WO2005068451A2 - Methods for the synthesis of dictyostatin and derivatives and analogues thereof, stereochemical characterisation, novel dictyostatin compounds and uses thereof and synthetic intermediates - Google Patents

Methods for the synthesis of dictyostatin and derivatives and analogues thereof, stereochemical characterisation, novel dictyostatin compounds and uses thereof and synthetic intermediates Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2005068451A2
WO2005068451A2 PCT/GB2004/005401 GB2004005401W WO2005068451A2 WO 2005068451 A2 WO2005068451 A2 WO 2005068451A2 GB 2004005401 W GB2004005401 W GB 2004005401W WO 2005068451 A2 WO2005068451 A2 WO 2005068451A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
formula
compound
give
salt
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/GB2004/005401
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2005068451A3 (en
Inventor
Oscar Delgado
Ian Paterson
Robert Britton
Karine Poullennec
Arndt Meyer
Amy E. Wright
Original Assignee
Cambridge University Technical Services Limited
Harbor Branch Oceanographic Institution, Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from GB0412744A external-priority patent/GB0412744D0/en
Application filed by Cambridge University Technical Services Limited, Harbor Branch Oceanographic Institution, Inc. filed Critical Cambridge University Technical Services Limited
Publication of WO2005068451A2 publication Critical patent/WO2005068451A2/en
Publication of WO2005068451A3 publication Critical patent/WO2005068451A3/en

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D313/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing rings of more than six members having one oxygen atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents

Definitions

  • This invention relates to a flexible synthetic process for the synthesis of dictyostatins, derivatives, analogues and salts thereof, to the stereochemical characterisation of dictyostatins, derivatives, analogues and salts thereof, to novel dictyostatins, derivatives and analogues thereof, to substantially pure dictyostatin, to uses of these dictyostatins, derivatives and analogues and salts thereof, and to intermediates useful in their preparation.
  • the diterpene commonly known as taxol isolated from several species of yew trees, is a mitotic spindle poison that stabilizes microtubules and inhibits their depolymerization to free tubulin (Fuchs, D.A., R.K. Johnson (1978) Cancer Treat. Rep. 62:1219-1222; Schifl ⁇ P.B., J. Fant, S.B. Horwitz (1979) Nature (London) 22:665-667).
  • Taxol is also known to have antitumor activity and has undergone a number of clinical trials which have shown it to be effective in the treatment of a wide range of cancers (Rowinski, E.K., R.C. Donehower (1995) N. Engl. J. Med. 332:1004-1014). See also, e.g., U.S. Patent Nos. 5,157,049; 4,960,790; and 4,206,221.
  • Marine sponges have also proven to be an important source of biologically active compounds.
  • a number of publications disclose organic compounds derived from marine
  • a prime target for the discovery and design of novel therapeutic agents against cancer is the mitotic apparatus of the cell and more specifically, microtubule assembly and its function (Wilson, L. (1975) "Microtubules as drug receptors: pharmacological properties of microtubule protein” Ann. N.Y. Acad. Sci. 253:213-231).
  • Ancillary functions of microtubules, including intracellular transport, signal transduction and the maintenance of cellular shape and motility are important factors which contribute to the overall growth of tumor cells and resulting metastases (Dustin, P. (1980) Sci. Am. 243:66-76).
  • Taxol is a microtubule interactive agent whose mechanism of action includes the premature polymerization of tubulin, resulting in hyperstable microtubule formation, blockage of cellular proliferation in the G /M phase of the cell cycle, mitotic spindle disorganization and cell death. Additional compounds, which are chemically unrelated to taxol, are rapidly coming onto the scene which share a similar mechanism of action with taxol and are the subject of intense research into their potential as novel antitumor agents. These include the epothilones A and B, macrolides isolated from a myxobacterium, Sorangium cellulosum (Bollag, D.M., P.A. McQueney, j. Zhu et al. (1995) Cancer Res.
  • V:Aandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 neoplastic cells to subvert the cytotoxic effects of the drug.
  • Some cells have developed mechanisms, which confer resistance to a number of structurally unrelated drugs.
  • This multi-drug resistance (or MDR) phenomenon may arise through a number of different mechanisms.
  • MDR multi-drug resistance
  • One of these involves the ability of a cell to reduce intracellular concentrations of a given drug through efflux from cytoplasm through and out the cell membrane by a series of unique ATP-dependent transporter proteins called-P-glycoproteins (Pgp) (Casazza, A.M. and CR. Fairchild (1996) Cancer Treat Res. 87:149-171).
  • Pgp unique ATP-dependent transporter proteins
  • the surface membrane 170 kDa Pgp, is encoded by the mdr-l gene and appears to require substrate binding before transport begins.
  • a wide range of compounds including a number of structurally- unrelated chemotherapeutic agents (adriamycin, vinblastine, colchicine, etoposide and taxol), are capable of being transported by Pgp and render the cell resistant to the cytotoxic effects of these compounds. While many normal cell types possess Pgp, in general, tumor cell lines, which possess high levels of mRNA specific for Pgp, also exhibit overexpression of membrane Pgp and demonstrate resistance to various drugs. This intrinsic resistance can be increased multifold by incubation of cells with stepwise increasing doses of a particular drug over a period of several months.
  • MRP multidrug resistance-associated protein
  • MRP has been found to occur naturally in a number of normal tissues
  • MRP Tandre s/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 including liver, adrenal, testis, and peripheral blood mononuclear cells (Krishan, A., Fitz, C M., and Andritsch, I. (1997), Cytometiy 29: 279-285). MRP has also been identified in tissues of the lung, kidney, colon, thyroid, urinary bladder, stomach, spleen (Sugawara,— I. (1998) The Cancer Journal 8(2)) and skeletal muscle (Kruh, G. D., Gaughan, K. T., Godwin, A., and Chan, A. (1995) Journal of the National Cancer Institute 87(16): " 1256-1258).
  • MRP multidrug resistance
  • MRP-mediated MDR involves some of the same classes of compounds as those which are mediated by P-gp, including vinca alkaloids, epipodophyllotoxins, anthracyclins and actinomycin D (Barrand, M., Bagrij, T., and Neo, S. (1997) General Pharmacology 28(5): 639-645).
  • P-gp the substrate specificity has been demonstrated to differ from that of P-gp ( Komorov, P. G., Shtil, A. A., Holian, O., Tee, L., Buckingham, L., Mechetner, E. B., Roninson, I. B., and Coon, J. S. (1998) Oncology Research 10: 185-192).
  • Drugs which would inhibit or which are not substrates for the MDR pump would, therefore, be useful as chemotherapeutic agents.
  • Some cancer cell lines which have been induced to develop resistance to one type of microtubule interactive agent such as taxol, have been found to be sensitive to other types of microtubule agents.
  • the chemically unrelated compounds epothilones (A and B), which are isolated from a myxobacterium, Sorangium cellulosum and are composed of 16 membered macrolides (Bollag, D.M., P.A. McQueney, J. Zhu et al. (1995) Cancer Res. 55:2325-2333) enhance microtubule stability, block cells in the G 2 /M phase of the cell cycle and prevent microtubule depolymerization in cancer cells, similar to taxol.
  • the epothilones also have a much greater cytotoxicity against p-glycoprotein expressing, multidrug resistant cells compared to non-multi-drug resistant cell lines.
  • Laulimalide and isolaulimalide are two compounds which share taxol's microtubule-stabilizing activity (Mooberry, S.L., G. Tien, A.H. Hernandez et al. (1999)
  • Laulimalide is a potent inhibitor of cellular proliferation with IC 5 o values in the low nanomolar range, whereas isolaulimalide is much less potent with IC 50 values in the low micromolar range. Both compounds inhibit cellular replication at the G /M phase of the cell cycle. Laulimalide and isolaulimalide inhibit the " proliferation of SKVLB-1 cells, a Pgp overexpressing multidrug-resistant cell line, again, suggesting that they are poor substrates for transport by Pgp.
  • Discodermolide a compound derived from the marine sponge, Discodermia dissoluta (Gunasekera, S.P., M. Gunasekera, R.E. Longley (1990) J. Org. Chem. 55:4912-4915), is a potent inhibitor of cellular proliferation and has a similar mechanism of action to taxol. Discodermolide blocks cells in the G 2 /M phase of the cell cycle (Longley, R.E., S.P. Gunasekera, D. Faherty et al. (1993) Jmmunosuppression by discodermolide. In: A.C Allison ed.
  • Immunomodulator compounds and compositions are useful for modulating or regulating immunological functions in animals.
  • Immunomodulators may be immunostimulants for building up immunities to, or initiate healing from, certain diseases and disorders.
  • immunomodulators may be immunoinhibitors or immunosuppressors for preventing undesirable immune reactions of the body to foreign materials, or to prevent or ameliorate autoimmune reactions or diseases.
  • Immunomodulators have been found to be useful for treating systemic autoimmune diseases, such as lupus erythematosus and diabetes, as well as immunodeficiency - - diseases. Further, immunomodulators may be useful for immunotherapy of cancer or to prevent rejections of foreign organs or other tissues in transplants, e.g., kidney, heart, or bone marrow.
  • immunomodulator compounds including FK506, muramylic acid dipeptide derivatives, levamisole, niridazole, oxysuran, flagyl, and others from the groups of interferons, interleukins, leukotrienes, corticosteroids, and cyclosporins. Many of these compounds have been found, however, to have undesirable side effects and/or high toxicity. New immunomodulator compounds are therefore needed to provide a wider range of immunomodulator function.
  • Dictyostatin 1 is a macrolide of polyketide origin which was first reported by Pettit et al. [1] from a sponge of the genus Spongia collected in the Republic of the Maldives.
  • U.S. Patent No. 5,430,053 [3] (incorporated herein in its entirety by reference) describes the isolation and structure of dictyostatin 1 as well as its ability to inhibit the growth of various cancer cell lines in vitro. These reports do not disclose any utility for the compound against multi-drug resistant tumors in animals or humans or the ability of dictyostatin 1 to induce microtubule hyperstabilizing activity.
  • dictyostatin was isolated from a Caribbean sponge (Corallistidae sp.) 1 - 2 - 1 and demonstrated to inhibit human cancer cell proliferation at nanomolar concentrations, retaining activity against multidrug-resistant cell lines and displaying a taxol-like mechanism of action, by binding to tubulin and promoting microtubule assembly.
  • Dictyostatin now joins an elite group of microtubule-stabilising polyketides of marine origin that includes laulimalide [5] , peloruside A 1 - 6 - 1 and discodermolide [7] , as natural product leads for the development of improved anti-cancer drugs (Myles, D. C. Myles (2001) Annu. Rep. Med.
  • a particularly desirable aspect of any method for the total synthesis of dictyostatins is for it to be a modular synthetic approach that is flexible, highly convergent and stereocontrolled, which then offers the potential to provide useful quantities of dictyostatin, as well as a range of structural derivatives and analogues to initiate SAR studies.
  • dictyostatin 1 or a salt, derivative or analogue thereof having the stereochemical structure shown in Figures 1 through 4.
  • dictyostatin 1 having the following formula (If) or a salt, derivative or analogue thereof:
  • each of R a , R b , R c , R d , R e and R f is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
  • R and R b together and/or R° and R d together and/or R e and R f together represent a single bond, a group of formula — CH 2 - or a group of formula -O-; each of R s , R h , R 1 and R is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy protecting group, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group, an aryl group and an acyl group;
  • R k is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group and an aralkyl group;
  • R p and R m are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
  • R p and R m together represent a single bond or a group of formula -CH 2 - or -O-;
  • R n is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (said alkyl group being optionally substituted with at least one substituent selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom, an aryl group, an acyl group and an alkoxy group), an alkenyl group (said alkenyl group being optionally substituted with at least one substituent selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom, an aryl group, an acyl group and an alkoxy group), an alkynyl group, a dienyl group and an aryl group;
  • R° is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group and an aralkyl group;
  • R q is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group,
  • V Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
  • R q and R h together represent a single bond
  • R r and R s are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a hydroxy group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, a haloalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
  • R r and R s together represent a single bond or a group of formula -CH 2 - or -O-;
  • R* and R u are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
  • R* and R u together represent a single bond or a group of formula -CH 2 - or -O-, or R* and
  • R u together with the 2 carbon atoms to which they are connected form an aryl group; each of R v , R w , R x , R y and R z is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a group of formula -NR'R" (wherein R' and R" are the same or different and each is a hydrogen atom, an aryl group or an alkyl group), an alkoxy group and a haloalkoxy group; and
  • X represents a group of formula -O-, a group of formula -CH 2 - or a group of formula
  • R 1 is a hydrogen atom and R 2 is selected from the group consisting of-O-P 1 (wherein P 1 represents a hydroxy protecting group), a leaving group and a group of formula
  • R 1 , R 2 andR 16 together with the carbon atom to which they are attached represent an ethynyl group
  • R 3 represents a group selected from a hydroxy protecting group, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group and an aryl group;
  • R 4 represents a group of formula -O-P 2 (wherein P 2 represents a hydroxy protecting group) or a group of formula P(R 19 ) 3 wherein each R 19 is the same or different and is as defined above, and R 5 represent a hydrogen atom, or
  • R 15 represents a hydrogen atom
  • R 4 , R 5 and R 15 together with the carbon atom to which they are attached represent an ethynyl group
  • R 6 is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a leaving group and a group of formula -CH 2 -P(R 19 ) 3 wherein each R 19 is the same or different and is as defined above, and
  • R 9 represents a group selected from a hydroxy protecting group, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group and an aryl group;
  • R 10 is a hydrogen atom
  • R 11 is a group of formula -O-P 3 , wherein P 3 represents a hydroxy protecting group and R 12 is a formyl group, or
  • R 13 is selected from the group consisting of a hydroxy protecting group, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group and an aryl group, and
  • R 13 is a hydrogen atom
  • R 13 and R 13' together represent a single bond
  • R 14 is a hydrogen atom or a carboxy protecting group
  • R 17 and R 18 are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a
  • Y is selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom, a group of formula Sn(R 20 ) 3
  • each R 20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group
  • Si(R 20 ) 3 (wherein each R 20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group), and a group of formula B(OR 21 ) 2 wherein each R 21 is the same or different and is an alkyl group or an aryl group;
  • Z is selected from the group consisting of a group of formula Sn(R 20 ) 3 . (wherein each R 20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a halogen atom and a group of formula
  • each R 21 is the same or different and is an alkyl group or an aryl group;
  • R k , R n , R°, R r , R s , R ⁇ , R w , R x , R y and R z are as defined above.
  • This method can, for example, be used for the total synthesis of dictyostatin of formula (If) or a salt thereof:
  • each of R a , R b , R c , R d , R e and R f is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group; an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
  • R a and R b together and/or R c and R d together and/or R e and R f together represent a single bond, a group of formula -CH 2 - or a group of formula -O-; each of R g , R h , R 1 and R J is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy protecting group, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group, an aryl group and an acyl group;
  • R k is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group and an aralkyl group;
  • R p and R m are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
  • R p and R m together represent a single bond or a group of formula -CH 2 - or -O-;
  • R n is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (said alkyl group being optionally substituted with at least one substituent selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom, an aryl group, an acyl group and an alkoxy group), an
  • alkenyl group (said alkenyl group being optionally substituted with at least one substituent selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom, an aryl group, an acyl group and an alkoxy group), an alkynyl group, a dienyl group and an aryl group; .
  • R° is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group and an aralkyl group;
  • R q is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group,
  • R r and R s are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a hydroxy group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
  • R r and R s together represent a single bond or a group of formula -CH 2 - or -O-;
  • R* and R u are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
  • R* and R u together represent a single bond or a group of formula -CH 2 - or -O-, or R* and
  • R u together with the 2 carbon atoms to which they are connected form an aryl group; each of R v , R , R x , R y and R z is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, ,an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a group of formula -NR'R"
  • R' and R" are the same or different and each is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), an alkoxy group and a haloalkoxy group;
  • X represents a group of formula -O-, a' group of formula -CH 2 - or a group of formula -
  • the method of the present invention also enables the production for the first time of dictyostatin of formula (If) above in high purity and confirms both the relative and absolute stereochemistry of dictyostatin, and this also forms another aspect of the present invention.
  • the present invention also provides a pharmaceutical composition
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising an effective amount of a pharmacologically active compound together with a carrier or diluent therefor, wherein said pharmacologically active compound is dictyostatin 1 or a pharmacologically acceptable salt, derivative or analogue thereof having the stereochemical structure shown in Figures 1 through 4.
  • the present invention also provides a pharmaceutical composition
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising an effective amount of a pharmacologically active compound together with a carrier or diluent therefor, wherein said pharmacologically active compound is a compound of formula (Io) or a pharmacologically acceptable salt thereof as defined above.
  • the present invention also provides a pharmaceutical composition
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising an effective amount of a pharmacologically active compound together with a carrier or diluent therefor, wherein said pharmacologically active compound is substantially pure dictyostatin of formula (If) or a pharmacologically acceptable salt thereof as defined above.
  • the present invention also provides a method for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer, said method comprising administering an effective amount of a cytotoxic
  • cytotoxic compound is dictyostatin 1 or a pharmacologically acceptable salt, derivative or analogue thereof having the stereochemical structure shown in Figures 1 through 4.
  • the present invention also provides a method for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer, said method comprising administering an effective amount of a cytotoxic compound to a patient suffering from said cancer, wherein said cytotoxic compound is a compound of formula (Io) or a pharmacologically acceptable salt as defined above.
  • the present invention also provides a method for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer, said method comprising administering an effective amount of a cytotoxic compound to a patient suffering from said cancer, wherein said cytotoxic compound is substantially pure dictyostatin of formula (If) or a pharmacologically acceptable salt thereof as defined above.
  • the present invention also provides a method for the prophylaxis or treatment of diseases that can be prevented or treated by compounds capable of stabilising microtubules, said method comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a pharmacologically effective amount of a compound of formula (Io) or a pharmacologically acceptable salt as defined above.
  • the present invention also provides a method for the prophylaxis or treatment of diseases that can be prevented or treated by compounds capable of stabilising microtubules, said method comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a pharmacologically effective amount of dictyostatin 1 or a pharmacologically acceptable salt, derivative or analogue thereof having the stereochemical structure shown in Figures 1 through 4.
  • the present invention also provides a method for the prophylaxis or treatment of diseases that can be prevented or treated by compounds capable of stabilising microtubules, said method comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a
  • the present invention also provides use of dictyostatin 1 or a pharmacologically acceptable ' salt, derivative or analogue thereof having the stereochemical structure shown in Figures 1 through 4 in the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer.
  • the present invention also provides use of a compound of formula (Io) or a pharmacologically acceptable salt as defined above in the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer.
  • the present invention also provides use of substantially pure dictyostatin of formula (If) or a pharmacologically acceptable salt thereof as defined above in the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer.
  • the present invention also provides use of dictyostatin 1 or a pharmacologically acceptable salt, derivative or analogue thereof having the stereochemical structure shown in Figures 1 through 4 in the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of diseases that can be prevented or treated by compounds capable of stabilising microtubules.
  • the present invention also provides use of a compound of formula (Io) or a pharmacologically acceptable salt as defined above in the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of diseases that can be prevented or treated by compounds capable of stabilising microtubules.
  • the present invention also provides use of substantially pure dictyostatin of formula (If) or a pharmacologically acceptable salt thereof as defined above in the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of diseases that can be prevented or treated by compounds capable of stabilising microtubules.
  • the first aspect of the present invention provides dictyostatin 1 or a salt, derivative or analogue thereof having the stereochemical structure shown in Figures 1 through 4.
  • This first aspect of the invention provides the first full stereochemical characterization of dictyostatin compounds. Methods of use for these compounds are also provided, including the control of cellular proliferation, cytotoxicity against human tumor cells resistant to chemotherapeutic agents, immunomodulation, and the control of inflammation (said uses arise from the role of dictyostatin compounds as tubulin polymerizers and microtubule stabilizers).
  • the dictyostatin class of compounds can be isolated from Dictyoceratid sponges of the genus Spongia as well as from a lithistid sponge of the family Corallistidae. See U.S. Patent No. 6,576,658, which is inco ⁇ orated herein, in its entirety, by reference.
  • dictyostatin 1 or a salt, derivative or analogue thereof having the stereochemical structure shown in Figures 1 through 4.
  • dictyostatin 1 having formula (If) or a salt, derivative or analogue thereof.
  • dictyostatin 1 or a salt, derivative or analogue thereof having the stereochemical structure shown in Figures 1 through 4, and in particular dictyostatin 1 having formula (If) or a salt, derivative or analogue thereof, for immunomodulation, control of inflammation, stabilization of microtubules, induction of polymerization of tubulin, inhibiting cellular proliferation, and/or inhibiting cellular proliferation of multi-drug resistant tumor cells.
  • analogues and “derivatives” refer to compounds which are substantially the same as another compound but which may have been modified by, for example, adding side groups, oxidation or reduction of the parent structure. Salts are also within the scope of the present invention. Analogues or derivatives of the exemplified compounds can be readily prepared using commonly
  • the subject invention particularly contemplates - analogues of dictyostatin 1 having the stereochemical_structure shown , in Figures 1 through 4, and in particular dictyostatin 1 having formula (If), that retain the stereochemistry reported herein.
  • one aspect of the subject invention provides analogues of dictyostatin 1 having the stereochemical structure shown in Figures 1 through 4, and in particular dictyostatin 1 having formula (If), that retain the stereochemistry in any, or all, points in the molecule but differ from natural dictyostation by one or more additions or deletions of side groups.
  • a further aspect of the subject invention is the use of the stereochemistry reported herein, in conjunction with similar information with respect to taxol and/or discodermolide to provide analogues that have the desired anti-proliferative activity.
  • salts within the scope of the invention are made by adding mineral acids, e.g., HCI, H 2 SO 4 , or strong organic acids, e.g., formic, oxalic, in appropriate amounts to form the acid addition salt of the parent compound or its derivative.
  • mineral acids e.g., HCI, H 2 SO 4
  • strong organic acids e.g., formic, oxalic
  • each of R a , R b , R c , R d , R e and R f is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
  • R a and R b together and/or R c and R d together and/or R e and R f together represent a single bond, a group of formula -CH 2 - or a group of formula -O-; each of R g , R h , R 1 and R J is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy protecting group, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group, an aryl group and an acyl group;
  • R k is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group and an aralkyl group;
  • R p and R m are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
  • R p and R m together represent a single bond or a group of formula -CH 2 - or -O-;
  • R n is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (said alkyl group being optionally substituted with at least one substituent selected from the group - consisting of a halogen atom, an aryl group, an acyl group and an alkoxy group), an alkenyl group (said alkenyl group being optionally substituted with at least one substituent selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom, an aryl group, an acyl group and an alkoxy group), an alkynyl group, a dienyl group and an aryl group;
  • R° is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group and an aralkyl group;
  • R q is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
  • R r and R s are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a hydroxy group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, a haloalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
  • R r and R s together represent a single bond or a group of formula -CH 2 - or -O-;
  • R*and R u are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
  • R 1 and R u together represent a single bond or a group of formula -CH 2 - or -O-, or R* and
  • R u together with the 2 carbon atoms to which they are connected form an aryl group; each of R v , R w , R x , R y and R z is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a group of formula -NR'R" (wherein R' and R" are
  • V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 the same or different and each is a hydrogen atom, an aryl group or an alkyl group), an alkoxy group and a haloalkoxy group;
  • X represents a group of formula -O-, a group of formula -CH 2 - or a group of formula
  • R 1 is a hydrogen atom and R 2 is selected from the group consisting of-O-P 1 (wherein P 1 represents a hydroxy protecting group), a leaving group and a group of formula -CH 2 -L (wherein L represents a leaving group), or
  • R 3 represents a group selected from a hydroxy protecting group, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group and an aryl group;
  • R 4 represents a group of formula -O-P 2 (wherem P 2 represents a hydroxy protecting group) or a group of formula P(R 19 ) 3 wherein each R 19 is the same or different and is as defined above, and R 5 represent a hydrogen atom, or
  • R 15 represents a hydrogen atom
  • R 4 , R 5 and R 15 together with the carbon atom to which they are attached represent an ethynyl group
  • R 6 is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a leaving group and a group of formula -CH 2 -P(R 19 ) 3 wherein each R 19 is the same or different and is as defined above, and
  • n 1 3;
  • R 9 represents a group selected from a hydroxy protecting group, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group and an aryl group;
  • R 10 is a hydrogen atom
  • R 11 is a group of formula -O-P 3 , wherein P 3 represents a hydroxy protecting group and R 12 is a formyl group, or
  • R is a hydrogen atom
  • R 13 and R 13 ' together represent a single bond
  • R 14 is a hydrogen atom or a carboxy protecting group
  • R 17 and R 18 are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or R 17 and R 18 together represent a single bond or a group of formula -CH 2 - or -O-, or R 17 and R 18 together with the 2 carbon atoms to which they are connected form an aryl group;
  • Y is selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom, a group of formula Sn(R 20 ) 3
  • each R 20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group
  • Si(R 20 ) 3 (wherein each R 20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group), and a group of formula B(OR 21 ) 2 wherein each R 21 is the same or different and is an alkyl group or an aryl group;
  • Z is selected from the group consisting of a group of formula Sn(R 20 ) 3 (wherein each R 20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a halogen atom and a group of formula
  • each R 21 is the same or different and is an alkyl group or an aryl group;
  • R k , R n , R°, R r , R s , R v , R w , R x , R y and R z are as defined above.
  • This method can, for example, be used for the total synthesis of dictyostatin of formula (If) or a salt thereof:
  • alkyl groups in the definitions of substituents R a , R b , R c , R d , R e , R f , R g , R h , R 1 , R j , R k , R p , R m , R n , R°, R q , R r , R s , R R U , R V , R w , R X , R y , R z , R, R " , R 3 , R 6 , R 9 , R 13 , R 16 , R 17 , R 18 , R 19 , R 20 and R 21 above are straight or branched alkyl groups having from 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • lower alkyl groups examples include methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, s-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, isopentyl, 2-methylbutyl, neopentyl, 1-ethylpropyl, n-hexyl, isohexyl, 4-methylpentyl, 3-methylpentyl, 2- methylpentyl, 1-methylpentyl, 3,3-dimethylbutyl, 2,2-dimethylbutyl, 1,1-dimethylbutyl, 1,2-dimethylbutyl, 1,3-dimethylbutyl, 2,3-dimethylbutyl and 2-ethylbutyl groups.
  • Alkyl groups having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms are preferred, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl and butyl groups are more preferred, and methyl, ethyl and propyl groups are most preferred.
  • R v , R w , R x , R y and R z methyl groups are particularly preferred.
  • alkenyl groups in the definitions of R a , R b , R c , R d , R e , R , R k , R p , R m , R n , R°, R q , R r , R S , R 4 , R U , R V , R W , R X , R y , R z , R 17 and R 18 above are straight or branched alkenyl groups having from 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • alkenyl groups examples include vinyl, 2-propenyl, l-methyl-2-propenyl, 2-methyl-2-propenyl, 2-ethyl-2-propenyl, 2-butenyl, 1- methyl-2-butenyl, 2-methyl-2-butenyl, l-ethyl-2-butenyl, 3-butenyl, l-methyl-3-butenyl, 2-methyl-3-butenyl, l-ethyl-3-butenyl, 2-pentenyl, l-methyl-2-pentenyl, 2-methyl-2- pentenyl, 3-pentenyl, l-methyl-3-pentenyl, 2-methyl-3-pentenyl, 4-pentenyl, l-methyl-4-
  • Alkenyl groups having from 2 to 4 carbon atoms are preferred, and alkenyl groups having 2 or 3 carbon atoms are most preferred.
  • alkynyl groups in the definitions of R a , R b , R c , R d , R e , R f , R k , R p , R m , R n , R°, R q , R r , R s , R R u , R v , R w , R x , R y , R z , R 17 and R 18 above are straight or branched alkynyl groups having from 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • alkynyl groups examples include ethynyl, 2-propynyl, 1 -methyl -2-propynyl, 2-butynyl, l-methyl-2-butynyl, l-ethyl-2-- butynyl, 3-butynyl, l-methyl-3-butynyl, 2-methyl-3-butynyl, l-ethyl-3-butynyl, 2- pentynyl, l-methyl-2-pentynyl, 3-pentynyl, l-methyl-3 -pentynyl, 2-methyl-3-pentynyl, 4- pentynyl, l-methyl-4-pentynyl, 2-methyl-4-pentynyl, 2-hexynyl, 3-hexynyl, 4-hexynyl and 5-hexynyl groups.
  • Alkynyl groups having from 2 to 4 carbon atoms are preferred,
  • the dienyl group in the definition of R n is a straight or branched dienyl group having from 4 to 10 carbon atoms. Preferred are groups having from 4 to 6 carbon atoms and 1,3-butadienyl groups are particularly preferred.
  • halogen atoms in the definitions of R a , R b , R c , R d , R e , R f , R p , R m , R n , R v , R w , R x , R y , R z , Y and Z above include fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine atoms.
  • haloalkyl groups in the definitions of R a , R b , R c , R d , R e , R f , R k , R p , R m , R°, R q , R r , R s , R R u , R v , R w , R x , R , R z , R 17 and R 18 above are alkyl groups as defined and exemplified above which are substituted with at least one halogen atom as exemplified above.
  • It is preferably a straight or branched halogenoalkyl group having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, examples of which include a trifluoromethyl, trichlorom ethyl, difluoromethyl, dichloromethyl, dibromomethyl, fluoromethyl, 2,2,2-trichloroethyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, 2-bromoethyl, 2-chloroethyl, 2-fluoroethyl and 2,2-dibromoethyl groups.
  • the alkoxy groups in the definitions of R a , R b , R c , R d , R e , R f , R p , R m , R n , R q , R r , R s , R ⁇ R u , R v , R w , R x , R y , R z , R 17 , R 18 and R 19 above are alkyl groups as defined and exemplified above which are bonded to an oxygen atom.
  • the alkoxy groups are preferably straight or branched alkoxy groups having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, such as methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, isopropoxy and butoxy groups.
  • R s , R R u , R v , R w , R x , R y , R z , R 17 , R 18 and R 19 above are alkoxy groups as defined above that are substituted with at least one halogen atom as exemplified above.
  • the haloalkoxy groups preferably have from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, such as difluoromefhoxy, trifluoromethoxy and 2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy groups.
  • R u , R v , R w , R x , R y , R z , R 17 and R 18 above are alkyl groups as defined and exemplified above that are substituted with at least one alkoxy group as defined and exemplified above.
  • Methoxymethyl, ethoxyethyl groups, groups, 1-methoxyethyl groups and 1 -ethoxyethyl groups are particularly preferred.
  • the aryl groups in the definitions of R a , R , R c , R d , R e , R f , R 8 , R h , R 1 , R j , R k , R p , R m , R n , R°, R q , R r , R s , R 1 , R u , R v , R w , R x , R y , R z , R 3 , R 9 , R 13 , R 17 , R 18 , R 19 and R 21 above are aryl groups that may optionally be substituted with at least one substituent selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a group of formula
  • aryl groups defined and exemplified above may be fused with a cycloalkyl group having from 3 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of such a fused ring group include 5- indanyl groups.
  • aryl groups are substituted, we prefer those that are substituted with from 1 to 4 substituents selected from the group above.
  • substituted aryl groups include 4-fluorophenyl, 3 -fluorophenyl, 4-chlorophenyl, 3-chlorophenyl, 3,4- difluorophenyl, 3,4-dichlorophenyl, 3,4,5-trifluorophenyl, 3-chloro-4-fluorophenyl, 3- difluoromethoxyphenyl, 3-trifluoromethoxyphenyl and 3-trifluoromethylphenyl.
  • the aralkyl groups in the definitions of R a , R b , R c , R d , R e , R f , R s , R h , R R j , R k , R p , R m , R°, R q , R r , R S , R l , R U , R V , R W , R X , R y , R z , R 3 , R 9 , R 13 , R 17 and R 18 above are alkyl groups as defined above that are substituted by at least one aryl group as defined and
  • Examples of such an aralkyl group include benzyl, indenylmethyl, phenanthrylmethyl, anthrylmethyl, ⁇ -naphthylmethyl, ⁇ -naphthylmethyl, diphenylmethyir friphenylmeth r yl ⁇ -nIphthyldipKenyi ethyl, 9-anthrylmethyl, piperonyl, 1-phenethyl, 2-phenethyl, 1-naphthylethyl, 2-naphthyletit ⁇ yl, 1-phenylpropyl, 2- phenylpropyl, 3-phenylpropyl, 1-naphthylpropyl, 2-naphthylpropyl, 3-naphthylpropyl,
  • benzyl, phenanthrylmethyl, anthrylmethyl, o ⁇ aph ⁇ ylmethyl, ⁇ - naphthylmethyl, diphenylmethyl, triphenylmethyl, 9-anthrylmethyl, piperonyl, 1- phenethyl, 2-phenethyl, 1-phenylpropyl, 2-phenylpropyl, 3-phenylpropyl, 1-phenylbutyl, 2-phenylbutyl, 3-phenylbutyl and 4-phenylbutyl are preferred.
  • the aryloxy groups in the definitions of R a , R b , R c , R d , R e , R f , R p , R m , R q , R r , R ⁇ R*, R u , R 17 , R 18 and R 19 above are aryl groups as defined and exemplified above that are bonded to an oxygen atom. Examples include phenoxy, naphthyloxy, phenanthryloxy and anthracenyloxy groups.
  • acyl groups in the definitions of R g , R h , R 1 , R J and R n are selected from aliphatic acyl groups, aromatic acyl groups and alkoxycarbonyl groups as defined and exemplified below:
  • aliphatic acyl groups examples of which include alkylcarbonyl groups having from 1 to 25 carbon atoms, examples of which include formyl, acetyl, propionyl, butyryl, isobutyryl, pentanoyl, pivaloyl, valeryl, isovaleryl, octanoyl, nonanoyl, decanoyl, 3-methylnonanoyl, 8-methylnonanoyl, 3-ethyloctanoyl, 3,7-dimethyloctanoyl, undecanoyl, dodecanoyl, tridecanoyl, tetradecanoyl, pentadecanoyl, hexadecanoyl, 1-methylpentadecanoyl, 14-methyl- pentadecanoyl, 13,13-dimethyltetradecanoyl, heptadecanoyl, 15-methylhexadecanoy
  • halogenated alkylcarbonyl groups having from 1 to 25 carbons in which the alkyl moiety thereof is substituted by at least one halogen atom
  • aromatic acyl groups examples of which include arylcarbonyl groups which comprise a carbonyl group which is substituted with an aryl group as defined above, examples of which include benzoyl, ⁇ -naphthoyl and ⁇ -naphthoyl groups, halogenated arylcarbonyl groups which comprise an arylcarbonyl group as defined above which is substituted with at least one halogen atom, examples of which include 2-bromobenzoyl, 4-chlorobenzoyl and 2,4,6-trifluorobenzoyl groups, alkylated arylcarbonyl groups which comprise an arylcarbonyl group as defined above which is substituted with at least one alkyl group as defined above, examples of which include 2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl and 4-toluoyl groups, alkoxylated arylcarbonyl groups which comprise an arylcarbonyl group as defined above which is substituted with at least one alkoxy group as defined above,
  • V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 an alkoxy group as defined above, examples of which include 2- (methoxycarbonyl)benzoyl groups, and- arylated arylcarbonyl groups which comprise an arylcarbonyl group as defined above which is substituted with at least one aryl group as defined above, examples of which include 4-phenylbenzoyl groups;
  • alkoxycarbonyl groups examples of which include alkoxycarbonyl groups Which comprise a carbonyl group substituted with an- - alkoxy group as defined above, examples of which include methoxycarbonyl, ethoxycarbonyl, propoxycarbonyl, butoxycarbonyl, s-butoxy-carbonyl, t-butoxycarbonyl and isobutoxycarbonyl groups, and alkoxycarbonyl groups as defined above which are substituted with at least one substituent selected from the group consisting of halogen atoms and trialkylsilyl groups
  • alkyl groups are as defined above
  • examples of which include 2,2,2- trichloroethoxycarbonyl and 2-trimethylsilylethoxycarbonyl groups.
  • hydroxy protecting groups in the definitions of R s , R h , R ⁇ R j , P 1 , P 2 , P 3 , R 3 'R ! and R 13 above are not particularly limited provided that they can protect a hydroxy group in a reaction.
  • Such a protecting group is a group which can be removed by a chemical reaction such as hydrogenolysis, hydrolysis, electrolysis and photolysis and may be, for example, an aliphatic acyl group, examples of which include an alkylcarbonyl group such as a formyl group, an acetyl group, a propionyl group, a butyryl group, an isobutyryl group, a pentanoyl group, a pivaloyl group, a valeryl group or an isovaleryl group, an alkoxyalkylcarbonyl group such as a methoxyacetyl group, or an unsaturated alkylcarbonyl group such as an (E)-2-methyl-2-butenoyl group; an aromatic acyl group, examples of which include an arylcarbonyl group such as a benzoyl group, an ⁇ - naphthoyl group or a ⁇ -naphthoyl group, a halogenated arylcarbon
  • V:/Tandre s/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 group a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group or a t-butyl group; an unsaturated alkyl group such as a vinyl group, an allyl group or a 2-butenyl group; an alkoxyalkyl group as defined above such as a methoxymethyl group and an ethoxyethyl group; a tetrahydropyranyl group; a tetrahydrofuranyl group; an alkoxyalkoxyalkyl group such as a methoxyethoxymethyl group; a benzyl group optionally substituted with an alkyl group as defined above, an alkoxy group as defined above or a halogen atom such as a benzyl group, a 4-methylbenzyl group, a 4-methoxybenzyl group or a 4-chlorobenz
  • Protection of a hydroxy group with the above described protecting groups or removal of these protecting groups can be accomplished according to standard methods (described in, for example, T.H. Green et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, JOHN WILEY & SONS, INC).
  • the carboxy protecting group in the definition of R 14 above are not particularly limited provided that they can protect a carboxy group in a reaction.
  • a protecting group is a group which can be removed by a chemical reaction such as hydrogenolysis, hydrolysis, electrolysis and photolysis and may be, for example, an alkyl group as defined and exemplified above; an alkenyl group as defined and exemplified above; an alkynyl group as defined and exemplified above; a haloalkyl group as defined and exemplified above; a hydroxyalkyl group such as a 2-hydroxyethyl, 2,3-dihydroxypropyl, 3-hydroxypropyl, 3,4-dihydroxybutyl or 4-hydroxybutyl group; an "aliphatic acyl"-"alkyl group” such as an acetylmethyl group; an aralkyl group as defined and exemplified above; and a tri-substituted silyl group substituted with an alky
  • the leaving groups in the definitions of L and R 10 are not particularly limited provided that they can be substituted in a reaction by a nucleophilic reagent.
  • Suitable leaving groups include, for example, a hydroxy group; a halogen atom as described above; an alkylsulfonyloxy group such as a methanesulfonyloxy group or an ethanesulfonyloxy group; a halogenated alkylsulfonyloxy group such as a trifluoromethanesulfonyloxy group; an aromatic sulfonyloxy group, which is for example, a hydroxy group; a halogen atom as described above; an alkylsulfonyloxy group such as a methanesulfonyloxy group or an ethanesulfonyloxy group; a halogenated alkylsulfonyloxy group such as a trifluoromethanesulfonyloxy
  • an arylsulfonyloxy group such as a benzenesulfonyloxy group, an alkylated arylsulfonyloxy group such as a p-toluenesulfonyloxy group, or a halogenated — arylsulfonyloxy group such as a p-chlorobenzenesulfonyloxy group.
  • the " ⁇ leaving group L in the definitions of L and R 10 is a halogen atom, a trifluoromethanesulfonyloxy group (a triflate group) or a methanesulfonyloxy group (a mesylate group).
  • any such salt should be a pharmacologically acceptable salt.
  • the salt formed with an acidic group include alkali metal salts such as a sodium salt, potassium salt or lithium salt, alkaline earth metal salts such as a calcium salt or magnesium salt, metal salts such as an aluminum salt or iron salt; amine salts, e.g., inorganic salts such as an ammonium salt and organic salts such as a t- octylamine salt, dibenzylamine salt, morpholine salt, glucosamine salt, phenylglycine alkyl ester salt, ethylenediamine salt, N-methylglucamine salt, guanidine salt, diethylamine salt, triethylamine salt, dicyclohexylamine salt, N,N'- dibenzylethylenediamine salt, chloroprocaine salt, procaine salt, diethanolamine salt, N- benzylphenethylamine salt, piperazine salt, tetramethylammonium salt or tris(hydroxymethyl)aminomethan
  • Preferred examples of the salt formed with a basic group include hydro-halides such as a hydrofluoride, hydrochloride, hydrobromide or hydroiodide, inorganic acid salts such as a nitrate, perchlorate, sulfate or phosphate; lower alkanesulfonates such as a methanesulfonate, trifluoromethanesulfonate or ethanesulfonate, arylsulfonates such as a benzenesulfonate or p-toluenesulfonate, organic acid salts such as an acetate, malate, fumarate, succinate, citrate, ascorbate, tartrate, oxalate or maleate; and amino acid salts such as a glycine salt, lysine salt, arginine salt, ornithine salt, glutamate or aspartate.
  • hydro-halides such as a hydrofluoride, hydrochloride
  • the compounds of the present invention are allowed to stand in the atmosphere for some time, they sometimes absorb water to form a hydrate. Such a hydrate is also embraced in the present invention.
  • the compounds of the present invention such as those of formulae (I), (II), (III), (IV) and (V) contain a number of asymmetric centres, and can therefore form optical __ isomers (including diastereoisomers).
  • optical __ isomers including diastereoisomers.
  • each of said isomers and mixtures of said isomers are depicted by a single formula. Accordingly, the present invention covers both the individual isomers and mixtures thereof in any proportion, including racemic mixtures. - - - - . _. .
  • a particularly preferred method according to (1) comprises the following steps:
  • each of said groups of formula R 19a are the same or different and represents an alkoxy group or a haloalkoxy group, to give a compound of formula (VI):
  • P 4 is a hydroxy-protecting group and is not particularly limited provided that it can protect a hydroxy group in a reaction.
  • a protecting group is a group which can be removed by a chemical reaction such as hydrogenolysis, hydrolysis, electrolysis and photolysis. Examples of such a protecting group are as given for protecting groups P 1 , P 2 and P 3 above. All other groups are as defined and exemplified previously.
  • Preferred methods according to method (10) include:
  • the late stage reduction of the enone 2 is controlled by the macrocyclic conformation adopted by the 22-membered ring.
  • the (lOZ)-olefin in 2' is produced via a coupling reaction, preferably a Still- Gennari-type olefination between the ⁇ -keto phosphonate 3' and aldehyde 4'; in conjunction with further coupling reaction, preferably a Stille cross-coupling using vinyl stannane 5 to deliver the (2Z,4E)-dienoate.
  • a coupling reaction preferably a Still- Gennari-type olefination between the ⁇ -keto phosphonate 3' and aldehyde 4'
  • further coupling reaction preferably a Stille cross-coupling using vinyl stannane 5 to deliver the (2Z,4E)-dienoate.
  • either of these two reactions could be employed to close the macrocycle, as an alternative to a more conventional Yamaguchi- macrolactonization, - offering considerable flexibility- in . the_ synthesis endgame.
  • the C ⁇ -C 26 subunit 4' is accessible via a coupling reaction, preferably a Horner-Wadsworth-Emmons (HWE) coupling, between aldehyde 6' and phosphonate 7, containing the terminal (Z)-diene.
  • a coupling reaction preferably a Horner-Wadsworth-Emmons (HWE) coupling
  • HWE Horner-Wadsworth-Emmons
  • TBS is a tert-butyldimethylsilyl group and PMB is a p- methoxybenzyl group
  • HWE coupling- partner-7- is achieved by addition of (MeO) 2 P(O)CH 2 Li to aldehyde 14, prepared from 1,3-diol 8 as described previously, f9 ' 12 -' delivering, after careful work-up, an epimeric mixture of alcohols, which is converted into ⁇ -keto phosphonate 7 (Dess-Martin periodinane, 83% over 2 steps).
  • Method (10) is highly flexible and allows functional group modifications at various points in the synthesis, allowing access to further dictyostatin derivatives and analogues. Examples include the following:
  • R alkyl, benzyl, acyl
  • R alkyl, benzyl, acyl
  • R sil alkyl group coupling partner C coupling partner B s
  • R silyl protecting group or alkyl group coupling partner A
  • C9 alcohol or not alkylating C9 alcohol after reduction - a total of 24 ethers of dictyostatin may be prepared selectively
  • R al is selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group, an aryl group and an aralkyl group as defined and exemplified above and M 1 is selected from copper and magnesium to give an intermediate of formula (XII):
  • R ql is selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group, an aryl group and an aralkyl group as defined and exemplified above and M 1 is selected from lithium, sodium, magnesium and potassium, to give a compound of formula (II) or a salt thereof:
  • step (b) Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 (33)
  • step (b) instead of reducing the double bond of the enone of the intermediate of formula (VI) to a single bond it is subjected to a conjugate addition reaction with a compound of formula R pl M 2 , wherein R pl is selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group, an aryl group and an aralkyl group as defined and exemplified above and M 2 is selected from copper and magnesium, before reducing the carbonyl group to a protected hydroxy group, to give an intermediate of formula (Vila):
  • Hal is a halogen atom (preferably an iodine atom);
  • Y is a halogen atom, a group of formula Sn(R ) 3 (wherein each R is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a group of formula Si(R 20 ) 3 (wherein each R 20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a group of formula B(OR 21 ) 2 wherein each R 21 is the same or different and is an alkyl group or an aryl group, a group of formula CHCHCO 2 R 14 or a group of formula CCCO 2 R 14 and R°, R v , R 13 and R 14 are as defined in (1) above, to give a compound of formula (XIN):
  • L 1 is a leaving group (preferably a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a triflate, a mesylate or a tosylate), Y 2 is a halogen atom, a group of formula Sn(R 20 ) 3 (wherein each
  • R 20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a group of formula Si(R 20 ) 3 (wherein each R 20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a group of formula B(OR 21 ) 2 wherein each R 21 is the same or different and is an alkyl group or an aryl group, a group of formula CHCHCO 2 R 14 or a group of formula CCCO 2 R 14 and R°, R v , R 13 and R 14 are as defined in (1) above, to give a compound of formula (XVII):
  • step (f) subjecting said compound of formula (XI) to step (g) as defined in (10) above to give a compound of formula (Ig) or a salt thereof as defined in (10) above and, if desired, removing any protecting groups R 3 , R 13 and P 4 from said compound of formula (Ig) to give hydroxyl groups and/or converting one or more of said groups and the hydroxyl group at the C-9 position to other functional groups of formulae R ⁇ , R 1 , R j and R h respectively to give a compound of formula (H ) or a salt thereof as defined in (10) above.
  • Examples of method (35) include those illustrated in Scheme 14 below:
  • step (c) subjecting said compound of formula (XI) to step (g) of (10) above to give a compound of formula (Ig) or a salt thereof and, if desired, subjecting said compound of formula (Ig) to step (h) of (10) above to give a compound of formula (Hi) or a salt thereof.
  • step (e) subjecting said compound of formula (XI) to step (g) of (10) above to give a compound of formula (Ig) or a salt thereof and, if desired, subjecting said compound of formula (Ig) to step (g) of (10) above to give a compound of formula (Hi) or a salt thereof.
  • L 1 is a leaving group (preferably a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a triflate, a mesylate or a tosylate) and all other groups are as defined in (1) above to give a compound of formula (XXV):
  • L 2 is a leaving group (preferably a halogen atom, a triflate, a mesylate or a tosylate) and all other groups are as defined in (1) above in a dithiane alkylation and then removing the dithiane group to give a compound of formula (XXV) as defined in (39) above;
  • M 2 is a selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom, Si(R') 3 (wherein R' is as defined in (1) above), Sn(R') 3 (wherein R is as defined is as defined in (1) above) and B(OR') 2 (wherein R' is as defined is as defined in (1) above), Q 2 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom or an alkoxy group as defined and exemplified above, and all other substituents are as defined in (1) above, to give a compound of formula (VI) as defined in (10) above;
  • Alk is an alkyl group as defined and exemplified above and all other groups are as defined in (1) above, to give a compound of formula (XXNIIIa) or (XXNIIIb):
  • step (f) subjecting said compound of formula (XI) to the reaction of step (g) of (10) above to give a compound of formula (Ig) or a salt thereof and, if desired, further subjecting said compound of formula (Ig) to the reactions of step (h) of (10) above to give a compound of formula (Ih).
  • R 13 is a hydroxy protecting group
  • X chiral auxiliary intermediate in total synthesis of dictyostatin (11 in
  • R 22 is selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a group of formula -NR'R" (wherein R' and R" are the same or different and each is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), an alkoxy group and a haloalkoxy group as defined and exemplified above and the other groups are as defined in (1) above, said method comprising the following steps:
  • R is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy protecting group, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group, an aryl group and an acyl group as defined and exemplified above and the other groups are as defined in (1) above, said method comprising the following steps:
  • R g , R h , R j , R j , R k , R n , R r , R s , R v , R w , R x , R y and R z are as defined in (1) above, said method comprising the following steps:
  • R ⁇ R R 1J , P 4 , R ⁇ , R n , R r , R s , R v , R w , R x , R y and R z are as defined in (10) above;
  • R g , R h , R j , R j , R k , R n , R r , R s , R v , R w , R x , R y and R z are as defined in (1) above, said method comprising the following steps:
  • R 3 , R y , R 13 , P 4 , R k , R n , R r , R s , R v , R w , R x , R y and R z are as defined in (10) above;
  • R g , R h , R R j , R k , R n , R r , R s , R v , R w , R x , R y and R z are as defined in (1) above and n3 is an integer of from 1 to 4, said method comprising the following steps:
  • R 3 , R 9 , R 13 , P 4 , R k , R n , R r , R s , R v , R w , R x , R y and R z are as defined in (10) above;
  • the flexible methods of the present invention allow the synthesis of many novel dictyostatins and derivatives, analogues and salts thereof, which also form apart of the present invention.
  • each of R a , R b , R c , R d , R e and R f is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
  • R a and R b together and/or R° and R d together and/or R e and R f together represent a single bond, a group of formula -CH 2 - or a group of formula -O-;
  • each of R s , R h , R 1 and R 3 is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy protecting group, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group, an aryl group and an acyl group;
  • R k is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group and an aralkyl group;
  • R p and R m are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
  • R p and R m together represent a single bond or a group of formula -CH 2 - or -O-;
  • R n is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (said alkyl group being optionally substituted with at least one substituent selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom, an aryl group, an acyl group and an alkoxy group), an
  • alkenyl group (said alkenyl group being optionally substituted with at least one substituent selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom, an aryl group, an acyl group and an alkoxy group), an alkynyl group, a dienyl group and an aryl group;
  • R° is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group and an aralkyl group;
  • R q is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group,
  • R r and R s are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a hydroxy group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
  • R r and R s together represent a single bond or a group of formula -CH 2 - or -O-;
  • R 4 and R u are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
  • R* and R u together represent a single bond or a group of formula -CH 2 - or -O-, or R* and
  • R u together with the 2 carbon atoms to which they are connected form an aryl group; each of R v , R , R x R y and R z is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a group of formula -NR'R"
  • R' and R" are the same or different and each is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), an alkoxy group and a haloalkoxy group;
  • X represents a group of formula -O-, a group of formula -CH 2 - or a group of formula -
  • R g , R h , R 1 and R J is the same or different and is selected the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group, an aryl group, an alkylcarbonyl group, a haloalkylcarbonyl group, an arylcarbonyl group and a trialkylsilyl group.
  • each of R* and R u is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group or an aryl group.
  • R n is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (said alkyl group being optionally substituted with at least one substituent selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom and an aryl group), an alkenyl group (said alkenyl group being optionally substituted with at least one substituent selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom and an aryl group), a dienyl group and an aryl group.
  • R 22 is selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a group of formula -NR'R" (wherein R 1 and R" are the same or different and each is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), an alkoxy group and a haloalkoxy group as defined and exemplified above and R 9 , R s , R h , R 1 , R j , R k , R n , R r , R s , R v , R , R x , R y and R z are as defined in (1) above.
  • R is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy protecting group, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group, an aryl group and an acyl group as defined and exemplified above and R 17 , R 18 , R g , R h , R f , R k , R n , R r , R s , R v , R w , R x , R y and R z are as defined in (1) above.
  • R g , R h , R R j , R k , R n , R r , R ⁇ R v , R w , R x , R y and R z are as defined in (1) above.
  • R g , R h , R j , R j , R k , R n , R r , R s , R v , R w , R x , R y and R z are as defined in (1) above.
  • R g , R h , R 1 , R j , R , R n , R r , R s , R v , R w , R x , R y and R z are as defined in (1) above and n3 is an integer of from 1 to 4.
  • substituents R a , R b , R c , R d , R e , R f , R g , R h , R R j , R k , R p , R m , R n , R°, R q , R r , R s , R R u , R v , R w , R x , R y , R z , R 17 , R 18 , R 22 , R 23 and X are as defined and exemplified in the definitions and examples of the methods of the invention above.
  • the present invention also provides a number of intermediate compounds that are particularly suitable for the synthesis of dictyostatins and derivatives, analogues and derivatives thereof, said intermediates being as follows:
  • R .1 1 , ⁇ R.2 z , r R>3 J , ⁇ R>4 4 , ⁇ R>5 s , ⁇ R 1°5, ⁇ R 1 1 6 0 , ⁇ R>k ⁇ , r R>r r , ⁇ R>w w a plausible_nd j ⁇ R>x x are as defined in (1) above.
  • R 3 , R k , R r , R s , R w and R x are as defined in (1) above.
  • L 1 is a leaving group (preferably a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a triflate
  • L is a leaving group (preferably a halogen atom, a triflate group, a mesylate group or a tosylate group)
  • P 2 is a hydroxy protecting group
  • R 3 , R k , R r , R s , R w and R x are as defined in (1) above.
  • M 2 is a selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom, Si(R') 3 (wherein R is as defined in (1) above), Sn(R') 3 (wherein R' is as defined is as defined in (1) above) and B(OR') 3 (wherein R' is as defined is as defined in (1) above), P 2 is a hydroxy protecting group and R 3 , R k , R r , R s , R w and R x are as defined in (1) above.
  • Alk is an alkyl group as defined and exemplified above and R 3 , R k , R r , R s , R w and R x are as defined in (1) above.
  • R°, R', R s , R y , R n , R y and R 2 are as defined in (1) above.
  • R 9 , R n , R y and R z are as defined in (1) above and each of said groups of formula R 19a is the same or different and represents an alkoxy group or a haloalkoxy group as defined and exemplified above.
  • R 9 , R n , R y and R z are as defined in (1) above.
  • R 9 , R n , R y and R z are as defined in (1) above and Q 2 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom or an alkoxy group as defined and exemplified above.
  • R , 10 , R> ⁇ , R ⁇ > 12 , R T 5 l3 , - Rno°, ⁇ Rv v , Y and n are as defined in (1) above.
  • R 13 , R 19 ,R° and R v are as defined in (1) above and Y 1 is a halogen atom, a group of formula Sn(R 20 ) 3 (wherein each R 20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a group of formula Si(R 20 ) 3 (wherein each R 20 is the same or different and is an alkyl
  • each R is the same or different and is an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • Y is a halogen atom, a group of formula Sn(R ) 3 (wherein each R 20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a group of formula Si(R 20 ) 3 (wherein each R 20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a group of formula B(OR 21 ) 2 wherein each R 21 is the same or different and is an alkyl group or an aryl group, a group of formula CHCHCO 2 R 14 or a group of formula CCCO 2 R 14 and R°, R v , R 13 and R 14 are as defined in (1) above,
  • each R is the same or different and is an alkyl group
  • a group of formula Si(R 20 ) 3 wherein each R 20 is the same or different
  • Y 2 is a halogen atom, a group of formula Sn(R 20 ) 3 (wherein each R 20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a group of formula Si(R 20 ) 3 (wherein each R 20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a group of formula B(OR 21 ) 2 wherein each R 21 is the same or different and is an alkyl group or an aryl group, a group of formula CHCHCO 2 R 14 or a group of formula CCCO 2 R 14 and R°, R v , R 13 and R 14 are as defined in (1) above
  • the methods of the present invention allows for the first time the synthesis of dictyostatin in substantially pure form, and this also forms a part of the present invention.
  • the present invention provides dictyostatin compounds, and uses thereof. These compounds specifically include dictyostatin 1 or a pharmacologically acceptable salt, derivative or analogue thereof having the stereochemical structure shown in Figures 1 through 4, especially dictyostatin having the formula (If) or a salt, derivative or analogue thereof, a compound of formula (Io) or a pharmacologically acceptable salt as defined
  • tubulin When tubulin is treated with dictyostatin, a rapid onset of polymerization occurs in the absence of cells. This effect is not reversed upon temperature change indicating a long term stabilization of the microtubules. Also, PANC-1 human pancreatic adenoma cells treated with dictyostatin 1 do not undergo mitosis and show pronounced rearrangement of the microtubules in the cells.
  • the compounds of the present invention have utility in the treatment of various human cancers that may have developed resistance to certain chemotherapeutic agents.
  • the compounds of the subject invention are useful in the treatment of multi-drug resistant cancers.
  • these compounds can be used in the treatment of a number of conditions in which aberrant cellular proliferation occurs. These conditions include, for example, autoimmune disorders and inflammatory diseases. In addition to use in the treatment of these disorders as well as other conditions involving pathological cellular proliferation, the compounds of the current invention can also be used as biochemical tools to study the process of tubulin polymerization/depolymerization and drug resistance.
  • the present invention pertains to the immunosuppressive use of the dictyostatins compounds of the present invention.
  • the dictyostatin compounds of the present invention can be used to reduce, suppress, inhibit, or prevent unwanted immune responses.
  • the dictyostatin compounds of the present invention are useful for treatments of humans or animals requiring immunosuppression. Examples of conditions for which immunosuppression is desired include, but are not limited to, treatment or prevention of autoimmune diseases such as diabetes, lupus, and rheumatoid arthritis. Immunosuppression is also frequently needed in conjunction with organ transplants. Immunosuppressive agents can also be utilized when a human or animal has been, or may be, exposed to superantigens or other factors known to cause
  • the dictyostatin compounds of the present invention are also useful as standards to assess the activity of other putative immunosuppressive agents.
  • the dictyostatin compounds of the present invention are useful for various non-therapeutic and therapeutic purposes. It is apparent from the testing that the dictyostatin compounds of the present invention are " effective for inhibiting cell growth. ⁇ Because of the antiproliferative properties of the compounds, they are useful to prevent unwanted cell growth in a wide variety of settings including in vit-o uses. They are also useful as standards and for teaching demonstrations. They can also be used as ultraviolet screeners in the plastics industry since they effectively absorb UV rays. As disclosed herein, they are also useful prophylactically and therapeutically for treating cancer cells in animals and humans.
  • dictyostatin compounds of the present invention can be accomplished by any suitable therapeutic method and technique presently or prospectively known to those skilled in the art. Further, the dictyostatin compounds of the present invention have use as starting materials or intermediates for the preparation of other useful compounds and compositions.
  • the dictyostatins and derivatives, analogues and salts thereof of the present invention can be used in the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer and the prophylaxis or treatment of diseases that can be prevented or treated by compounds capable of stabilising microtubules. They are potentially of particular use against multi- drug resistant cancers where resistance is caused by either pGp or MRP resistance mechanisms. Furthermore, they can also be used in the inhibition of cellular proliferation, e.g. in the prophylaxis or treatment of autoimmune diseases or inflammatory diseases such as diabetes, lupus, rheumatoid arthritis or organ transplant rejection.
  • the present invention also provides:
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising an effective amount of a pharmacologically active compound together with a carrier or diluent therefor, wherein said pharmacologically active compound is a compound as defined in any one of (50) to
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising an effective amount of a pharmacologically active compound together with a carrier or diluent therefor, wherein said pharmacologically active compound is substantially pure dictyostatin of formula (If) or a pharmacologically acceptable salt thereof as defined in any one of (115) to (123) above.
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising an effective amount of a pharmacologically active compound together with a carrier or diluent therefor, wherein said pharmacologically active compound is dictyostatin 1 or a pharmacologically acceptable salt, derivative or analogue thereof having the stereochemical structure shown in Figures 1 through 4, and preferably dictyostatin having the formula (If) or a salt, derivative or analogue thereof.
  • a method for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer comprising administering an effective amount of a cytotoxic compound to a patient suffering from said cancer, wherein said cytotoxic compound is a compound as defined in any one of (50) to (72) above.
  • a method for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer comprising administering an effective amount of a cytotoxic compound to a patient suffering from said cancer, wherein said cytotoxic compound is a compound as defined in any one of (115) to (123) above.
  • (130) A method according to (129), wherein said cancer is selected from the group consisting of leukemia, lung cancer, colon cancer, pancreatic cancer, ovarian cancer,
  • (131) A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer, said method comprising administering an effective amount of a cytotoxic compound to a patient suffering from said cancer, wherein said cytotoxic compound is dictyostatin 1 or a pharmacologically acceptable salt, derivative or analogue thereof having the stereochemical structure shown in Figures 1 through 4, and preferably dictyostatin having the formula (If) or a salt, derivative or analogue thereof.
  • (132) A method according to (131), wherein said cancer is selected from the group consisting of leukemia, lung cancer, colon cancer, pancreatic cancer, ovarian cancer, uterine cancer, brain cancer, renal cancer, prostate cancer, breast cancer and melanoma.
  • a method for the prophylaxis or treatment of diseases that can be prevented or treated by compounds capable of stabilising microtubules comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a pharmacologically effective amount of dictyostatin 1 or a pharmacologically acceptable salt, derivative or analogue thereof having the stereochemical structure shown in Figures 1 through 4, and preferably dictyostatin having the formula (If) or a salt, derivative or analogue thereof.
  • V Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 _ ___ PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 said method comprising administering to said animal a pharmacologically effective amount of a compound as defined in any one of (50) to (72) above.
  • (138) A method for inhibiting cellular proliferation in an animal, that may be human, said method comprising administering to said animal a pharmacologically effective amount of a compound as defined in any one of (115) to (123) above.
  • (140) A method for inhibiting cellular proliferation in an animal, that may be human, said method comprising administering to said animal a pharmacologically effective amount of dictyostatin 1 or a pharmacologically acceptable salt, derivative or analogue thereof having the stereochemical structure shown in Figures 1 through 4, and preferably dictyostatin having the formula (If) or a salt, derivative or analogue thereof.
  • cancer is selected from the group consisting of leukemia, lung cancer, colon cancer, pancreatic cancer, ovarian cancer, uterine cancer, brain cancer, renal cancer, prostate cancer, breast cancer and melanoma.
  • cancer is selected from the group consisting of leukemia, lung cancer, colon cancer, pancreatic cancer, ovarian cancer, uterine cancer, brain cancer, renal cancer, prostate cancer, breast cancer and melanoma.
  • the dictyostatins and derivatives, analogues and salts thereof of the present invention are used as a medicament for the treatment or prevention of cancer and diseases that can be prevented or treated by compounds capable of stabilising microtubules, as described above
  • the dictyostatins and derivatives, analogues and salts thereof of the present invention can be administered alone, and can also be administered orally in a pharmaceutical formulation such as a tablet, capsule, granule, powder or syrup or parenterally in a pharmaceutical formulation such as an injection, suppository, stick preparation or external preparation, by combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, diluent and the like.
  • a pharmaceutical formulation such as a tablet, capsule, granule, powder or syrup or parenterally in a pharmaceutical formulation such as an injection, suppository, stick preparation or external preparation, by combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, diluent and the like.
  • Remington's Pharmaceutical Science by E.W. Martin describes formulations which can be used
  • the excipient may be, for example, an organic excipient or an inorganic excipient.
  • Organic excipients include, for example, a sugar derivative such as lactose, sucrose, glucose, mannitol or sorbitol; a starch derivative such as corn starch, potato starch, ⁇ -starch, or dextrin; a cellulose derivative such as crystalline cellulose; acacia; dextran; or puUulan.
  • Inorganic excipients may be, for example, a silicate derivative such as light silicic acid anhydride, synthesized aluminum silicate, calcium silicate or magnesium metasilicate aluminate; a phosphate such as calcium hydrogenphosphate; a carbonate such as calcium carbonate; or a sulfate such as calcium sulfate.
  • a silicate derivative such as light silicic acid anhydride, synthesized aluminum silicate, calcium silicate or magnesium metasilicate aluminate
  • a phosphate such as calcium hydrogenphosphate
  • a carbonate such as calcium carbonate
  • a sulfate such as calcium sulfate.
  • the lubricant may be, for example, stearic acid; a metal stearate such as calcium stearate or magnesium stearate; talc; colloidal silica; a wax such as beeswax or spermaceti; boric acid; adipic acid; a sulfate such as sodium sulfate; a glycol; fumaric acid; sodium benzoate; DL-leucine; a lauryl sulfate such as sodium lauryl sulfate or magnesium lauryl sulfate; a silicic acid derivative such as silicic acid anhydride or silicic acid hydrate; or a starch derivative as described above.
  • the binder may be, for example, hydroxypropyl cellulose, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone, poly(ethylene glycol) or the derivatives described in the above excipient.
  • the disintegrant may be, for example, a cellulose derivative such as a lower- substituted hydroxypropyl cellulose, carboxymethyl cellulose, calcium carboxymethyl cellulose or sodium internally cross-linked carboxymethyl cellulose; a chemically modified starch-cellulose derivative such as carboxymethyl starch or sodium carboxymethyl starch; or cross-linked polyvinylpyrrolidone.
  • a cellulose derivative such as a lower- substituted hydroxypropyl cellulose, carboxymethyl cellulose, calcium carboxymethyl cellulose or sodium internally cross-linked carboxymethyl cellulose
  • a chemically modified starch-cellulose derivative such as carboxymethyl starch or sodium carboxymethyl starch
  • cross-linked polyvinylpyrrolidone cross-linked polyvinylpyrrolidone
  • the emulsifier may be, for example, a colloidal clay such as bentonite or veegum; a metal hydroxide such as magnesium hydroxide or aluminum hydroxide; an anionic surfactant such as sodium lauryl sulfate or calcium stearate; a cationic surfactant such as benzalkonium chloride; or a non-ionic surfactant such as a polyoxyethylenealkylether, a polyoxyethylene sorbitan ester of fatty acid or a sucrose ester of a fatty acid.
  • a colloidal clay such as bentonite or veegum
  • a metal hydroxide such as magnesium hydroxide or aluminum hydroxide
  • an anionic surfactant such as sodium lauryl sulfate or calcium stearate
  • a cationic surfactant such as benzalkonium chloride
  • a non-ionic surfactant such as a polyoxyethylenealkylether, a polyoxyethylene sorbit
  • the stabilizer may be, for example, a parahydroxybenzoic acid ester such as methylparaben or propylparaben; an alcohol such as chlorobutanol, benzyl alcohol or phenethyl alcohol; benzalkonium chloride; a phenol derivative such as phenol or cresol; thimerosal; dehydroacetic acid; or sorbic acid.
  • a parahydroxybenzoic acid ester such as methylparaben or propylparaben
  • an alcohol such as chlorobutanol, benzyl alcohol or phenethyl alcohol
  • benzalkonium chloride a phenol derivative such as phenol or cresol
  • thimerosal dehydroacetic acid
  • sorbic acid sorbic acid
  • the corrigent may be, for example, a conventional sweetening, souring, flavoring agent or the like.
  • the dosage level of the dictyostatins and derivatives, analogues and salts thereof of the present invention varies depending on the disease being treated, the age of the patient, weight, health, kind of concurrent treatment, if any, frequency of treatment, and therapeutic ratio.
  • new pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention will advantageously comprise between about . 0.1% and 45%, and especially, 1 and 15%, by weight of the total of one or more of the new compounds based on the weight of the total composition including carrier or diluent.
  • dosage levels of the administered active ingredients can be: intravenous, 0.01 to about 20 mg/kg; intraperitoneal, 0.01 to about 100 mg/kg; subcutaneous, 0.01 to about 100 mg/kg; intramuscular, 0.01 to about 100 mg/kg; orally 0.01 to about 200 mg/kg, and preferably about 1 to 100 mg/kg; intranasal instillation, 0.01 to about 20 mg/kg; and aerosol, 0.01 to about 20 mg/kg of animal (body) weight.
  • the work of the present inventors shows that the dictyostatins and derivatives, analogues and salts thereof of the present invention are potent inducers of tubulin polymerization and stabilizers of the microtubule network. This activity is useful in the treatment of diseases caused by proliferation of cells including autoimmune and inflammatory processes. Moreover, their work indicates that the dictyostatin class of metabolites are useful in the treatment of multi-drug resistant tumors where resistance is caused by either the pGp or MRP resistance mechanisms.
  • Figure 2 shows aspects of the stereochemistry of dictyostatin.
  • Figure 3 shows aspects of the stereochemistry of dictyostatin.
  • Figure 4 shows aspects of the stereochemistry of dictyostatin.
  • Figure 5 shows the chemical structure of dictyostatin having formula (If) and discodermolide.
  • Figure 6 shows 1H NMR spectrum of naturally obtained dictyostatin having formula (If) in CD 3 OD (700 MHz).
  • Figure 7 shows NOESY spectrum of naturally obtained dictyostatin having formula (If) in CD 3 OD (700 MHz).
  • Figure 8 shows HSQC-HECADE spectrum of naturally obtained dictyostatin having formula (If) in CD 3 OD (700 MHz).
  • Figure 9 shows perspective drawings of the lowest energy conformation of dictyostatin having formula (If) generated by Macromodel V 7.2.
  • Figure 10 is an HPLC trace observed at 225 nm for dictyostatin having formula (If) prepared according to the method of the present invention.
  • Figure 11 is an HPLC trace observed at 256 nm for dictyostatin having formula (If) prepared according to the method of the present invention.
  • Figure 12 is an HPLC trace observed at 263 nm for dictyostatin having formula (If) prepared according to the method of the present invention.
  • Figure 13 is a 1H nmr spectrum (CD 3 OD, 500 MHz) for dictyostatin having formula (If) prepared according to the method of the present invention.
  • Figure 14 is a 13 C nmr spectrum (CD 3 OD, 125 MHz) for dictyostatin having formula (If) prepared according to the method of the present invention.
  • Figure 15 shows immunofluorescence images of stained A549 cells treated with control, natural and synthetic dictyostatin 1 and paclitaxel.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Organic Low-Molecular-Weight Compounds And Preparation Thereof (AREA)
  • Heterocyclic Carbon Compounds Containing A Hetero Ring Having Oxygen Or Sulfur (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)

Abstract

A method for the synthesis of dictyostatin or a derivative thereof having Formula (I) is provided.

Description

Methods for the Synthesis of Dictyostatin and Derivatives and Analogues Thereof^ Stereochemical Characterisation, Novel Dictyostatin Compounds and Uses Thereof and Synthetic Intermediates
Field of the Invention
This invention relates to a flexible synthetic process for the synthesis of dictyostatins, derivatives, analogues and salts thereof, to the stereochemical characterisation of dictyostatins, derivatives, analogues and salts thereof, to novel dictyostatins, derivatives and analogues thereof, to substantially pure dictyostatin, to uses of these dictyostatins, derivatives and analogues and salts thereof, and to intermediates useful in their preparation.
Background of the Invention
Of great importance to man is the control of pathological cellular proliferation. While certain methods and chemical compositions have been developed which aid in inhibiting, remitting, or controlling cellular proliferation, new methods and compositions are needed.
In searching for new natural product leads for potential biomedical applications, it has been found that some organisms are sources for chemical structures of great diversity and having useful biological activity. For example, the diterpene commonly known as taxol, isolated from several species of yew trees, is a mitotic spindle poison that stabilizes microtubules and inhibits their depolymerization to free tubulin (Fuchs, D.A., R.K. Johnson (1978) Cancer Treat. Rep. 62:1219-1222; Schiflζ P.B., J. Fant, S.B. Horwitz (1979) Nature (London) 22:665-667). Taxol is also known to have antitumor activity and has undergone a number of clinical trials which have shown it to be effective in the treatment of a wide range of cancers (Rowinski, E.K., R.C. Donehower (1995) N. Engl. J. Med. 332:1004-1014). See also, e.g., U.S. Patent Nos. 5,157,049; 4,960,790; and 4,206,221.
Marine sponges have also proven to be an important source of biologically active compounds. A number of publications disclose organic compounds derived from marine
V: Tandrews/Cambridge Universit /WPP290192sl PCT description CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 sponges including Scheuer, P. J. (ed.) Marine Natural Products, Chemical and Biological Perspectives, Academic Press, New York, 1978-1983, Vol. I-V; Uemura, D., K. Takahashi, T. Yamamoto, C. Katayama, J. Tanaka, Y. Okumura, Y. Hirata (1985) J. Am. Chem. Soc. 107:4796-4798; Minale, L. et al. (1976) Fortschr. Chem. org. Naturst. 33:1-72; Faulkner, DJ. (1998) Natural Products Reports 15:113-158; Gunasekera, S.P., M. Gunasekera, R.E. Longley and G.K. Schulte (1990) J Org. Chem., 55:4912-4915.
A prime target for the discovery and design of novel therapeutic agents against cancer is the mitotic apparatus of the cell and more specifically, microtubule assembly and its function (Wilson, L. (1975) "Microtubules as drug receptors: pharmacological properties of microtubule protein" Ann. N.Y. Acad. Sci. 253:213-231). Ancillary functions of microtubules, including intracellular transport, signal transduction and the maintenance of cellular shape and motility are important factors which contribute to the overall growth of tumor cells and resulting metastases (Dustin, P. (1980) Sci. Am. 243:66-76). Taxol is a microtubule interactive agent whose mechanism of action includes the premature polymerization of tubulin, resulting in hyperstable microtubule formation, blockage of cellular proliferation in the G /M phase of the cell cycle, mitotic spindle disorganization and cell death. Additional compounds, which are chemically unrelated to taxol, are rapidly coming onto the scene which share a similar mechanism of action with taxol and are the subject of intense research into their potential as novel antitumor agents. These include the epothilones A and B, macrolides isolated from a myxobacterium, Sorangium cellulosum (Bollag, D.M., P.A. McQueney, j. Zhu et al. (1995) Cancer Res. 55:2325-2333); eleutherobin, obtained from a marine soft coral (Lindel, T., P.R. Jensen, W. Fenical et al. (1997) J. Am. Chem. Soc. 119:8744-8745); laulimalide, isolated from a marine sponge (Mooberry, S.L., G. Tien, A.H. Hernandez et al. (1999) Cancer Res. 59:653-660); and discodermolide isolated from a marine sponge (Gunasekera, S.P., M. Gunasekera, RE. Longley (1990) J. Org. Chem. 55:4912-4915 and Ter Haar E., R.J. Kowalski, E.Hamel, et. al. (1996) Biochemistiy 3:243-250). All of these compounds induce microtubule hyperstabilizing activity and are cytotoxic in vitro to tumor cells in the nanomolar range.
The success of chemotherapy for the treatment of various cancers can be substantially negated though cellular mechanisms which have evolved to enable
V:Aandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 neoplastic cells to subvert the cytotoxic effects of the drug. Some cells have developed mechanisms, which confer resistance to a number of structurally unrelated drugs. This multi-drug resistance (or MDR) phenomenon may arise through a number of different mechanisms. One of these involves the ability of a cell to reduce intracellular concentrations of a given drug through efflux from cytoplasm through and out the cell membrane by a series of unique ATP-dependent transporter proteins called-P-glycoproteins (Pgp) (Casazza, A.M. and CR. Fairchild (1996) Cancer Treat Res. 87:149-171). The surface membrane, 170 kDa Pgp, is encoded by the mdr-l gene and appears to require substrate binding before transport begins. A wide range of compounds, including a number of structurally- unrelated chemotherapeutic agents (adriamycin, vinblastine, colchicine, etoposide and taxol), are capable of being transported by Pgp and render the cell resistant to the cytotoxic effects of these compounds. While many normal cell types possess Pgp, in general, tumor cell lines, which possess high levels of mRNA specific for Pgp, also exhibit overexpression of membrane Pgp and demonstrate resistance to various drugs. This intrinsic resistance can be increased multifold by incubation of cells with stepwise increasing doses of a particular drug over a period of several months. This can be further facilitated by the addition of the MDR reversal agent, verapamil (Casazza, A.M. and CR. Fairchild (1996) supra) in combination with the particular drug. Drug resistant cell lines produced in this fashion exhibit resistance to drug cytotoxicity from 20 to 500 fold, compared to parental cell lines.
An additional target for cancer drug discovery is a high molecular weight membrane protein associated with multi-drug resistance properties of certain tumor cells known as the multidrug resistance-associated protein (MRP). MRP is a 190 kD membrane-bound glycoprotein (Bellamy, W. T. (1996), Annu. Rev. Pharmacol. Toxicol., 36: 161-183) which belongs to the same family of proteins as the p-glycoprotein pump P-gp (Broxterman, H. J., Giaccone, G., and Lankelma, J. (1995), Cwrent Opinion in Oncology, 7:532-540) but shares less than 15% homology of amino acids with P-gp (Komorov, P. G., Shtil, A. A., Holian, O., Tee, L., Buckingham, L., Mechetner, E. B., Roninson, I. B., and Coon, J. S. (1998), Oncology Research, 10: 185-192). MRP has been found to occur naturally in a number of normal tissues,
V: Tandre s/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 including liver, adrenal, testis, and peripheral blood mononuclear cells (Krishan, A., Fitz, C M., and Andritsch, I. (1997), Cytometiy 29: 279-285). MRP has also been identified in tissues of the lung, kidney, colon, thyroid, urinary bladder, stomach, spleen (Sugawara,— I. (1998) The Cancer Journal 8(2)) and skeletal muscle (Kruh, G. D., Gaughan, K. T., Godwin, A., and Chan, A. (1995) Journal of the National Cancer Institute 87(16): " 1256-1258). High levels of MRP have been implicated in multidrug resistance (MDR) in cancers of the lung and pancreas (Miller, D. W., Fontain, M., Kolar, C, and Lawson, T. (1996) Cancer Letters 107: 301-306), and in neuroblastomas, leukemias and cancer of the thyroid (Kruh, G. D., Gaughan, K. T., Godwin, A., and Chan, A. (1995) Journal of the National Cancer Institute 87(16): 1256-1258), as well as bladder, ovarian and breast cancers (Barrand, M., Bagrij, T., and Neo, S. (1997) General Pharmacology 28(5): 639-645). MRP-mediated MDR involves some of the same classes of compounds as those which are mediated by P-gp, including vinca alkaloids, epipodophyllotoxins, anthracyclins and actinomycin D (Barrand, M., Bagrij, T., and Neo, S. (1997) General Pharmacology 28(5): 639-645). However, the substrate specificity has been demonstrated to differ from that of P-gp (Komorov, P. G., Shtil, A. A., Holian, O., Tee, L., Buckingham, L., Mechetner, E. B., Roninson, I. B., and Coon, J. S. (1998) Oncology Research 10: 185-192). Drugs which would inhibit or which are not substrates for the MDR pump would, therefore, be useful as chemotherapeutic agents.
Some cancer cell lines, which have been induced to develop resistance to one type of microtubule interactive agent such as taxol, have been found to be sensitive to other types of microtubule agents. For example, the chemically unrelated compounds epothilones (A and B), which are isolated from a myxobacterium, Sorangium cellulosum and are composed of 16 membered macrolides (Bollag, D.M., P.A. McQueney, J. Zhu et al. (1995) Cancer Res. 55:2325-2333) enhance microtubule stability, block cells in the G2/M phase of the cell cycle and prevent microtubule depolymerization in cancer cells, similar to taxol. The epothilones also have a much greater cytotoxicity against p-glycoprotein expressing, multidrug resistant cells compared to non-multi-drug resistant cell lines.
Laulimalide and isolaulimalide, are two compounds which share taxol's microtubule-stabilizing activity (Mooberry, S.L., G. Tien, A.H. Hernandez et al. (1999)
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge Universiry WPP290192sl PCT description CUTS &. Harbor Branch/29.12.04 Cancer Res. 59:653-660), but are not chemically related to taxol. Laulimalide is a potent inhibitor of cellular proliferation with IC5o values in the low nanomolar range, whereas isolaulimalide is much less potent with IC50 values in the low micromolar range. Both compounds inhibit cellular replication at the G /M phase of the cell cycle. Laulimalide and isolaulimalide inhibit the" proliferation of SKVLB-1 cells, a Pgp overexpressing multidrug-resistant cell line, again, suggesting that they are poor substrates for transport by Pgp.
Discodermolide, a compound derived from the marine sponge, Discodermia dissoluta (Gunasekera, S.P., M. Gunasekera, R.E. Longley (1990) J. Org. Chem. 55:4912-4915), is a potent inhibitor of cellular proliferation and has a similar mechanism of action to taxol. Discodermolide blocks cells in the G2/M phase of the cell cycle (Longley, R.E., S.P. Gunasekera, D. Faherty et al. (1993) Jmmunosuppression by discodermolide. In: A.C Allison ed. Annals of the New York Academy of Sciences Conference Proceedings, "Immunosuppressive and Anti-inflammatory Drugs" Vol. 696, April 12-15) and induces the hyperstabilization of microtubules in cells, leading to cell death (ter Harr, E., Kowalski et al. (1996) Biochemistry 35:243-250). Discodermolide also inhibits the proliferation of Pgp overexpressing, multidrug-resistant cell lines (Kowalski, R. J. et al. (1997) Mol. Pharmacol. 52:613-622).
The prevention and control of inflammation is also of great importance for the treatment of humans and animals. Much research has been devoted to development of compounds having anti-inflammatory properties. Certain methods and chemical compositions have been developed which aid in inhibiting or controlling inflammation, but additional anti-inflammatory methods and compositions are needed. hnmunomodulation is a developing segment of immunopharmacology. Immunomodulator compounds and compositions, as the name implies, are useful for modulating or regulating immunological functions in animals. Immunomodulators may be immunostimulants for building up immunities to, or initiate healing from, certain diseases and disorders. Conversely, immunomodulators may be immunoinhibitors or immunosuppressors for preventing undesirable immune reactions of the body to foreign materials, or to prevent or ameliorate autoimmune reactions or diseases.
V: Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 Immunomodulators have been found to be useful for treating systemic autoimmune diseases, such as lupus erythematosus and diabetes, as well as immunodeficiency - - diseases. Further, immunomodulators may be useful for immunotherapy of cancer or to prevent rejections of foreign organs or other tissues in transplants, e.g., kidney, heart, or bone marrow.
Various immunomodulator compounds have been discovered, including FK506, muramylic acid dipeptide derivatives, levamisole, niridazole, oxysuran, flagyl, and others from the groups of interferons, interleukins, leukotrienes, corticosteroids, and cyclosporins. Many of these compounds have been found, however, to have undesirable side effects and/or high toxicity. New immunomodulator compounds are therefore needed to provide a wider range of immunomodulator function.
Dictyostatin 1 is a macrolide of polyketide origin which was first reported by Pettit et al.[1] from a sponge of the genus Spongia collected in the Republic of the Maldives. U.S. Patent No. 5,430,053[3] (incorporated herein in its entirety by reference) describes the isolation and structure of dictyostatin 1 as well as its ability to inhibit the growth of various cancer cell lines in vitro. These reports do not disclose any utility for the compound against multi-drug resistant tumors in animals or humans or the ability of dictyostatin 1 to induce microtubule hyperstabilizing activity.
More recently, dictyostatin was isolated from a Caribbean sponge (Corallistidae sp.)1-2-1 and demonstrated to inhibit human cancer cell proliferation at nanomolar concentrations, retaining activity against multidrug-resistant cell lines and displaying a taxol-like mechanism of action, by binding to tubulin and promoting microtubule assembly. Dictyostatin now joins an elite group of microtubule-stabilising polyketides of marine origin that includes laulimalide[5], peloruside A1-6-1 and discodermolide[7], as natural product leads for the development of improved anti-cancer drugs (Myles, D. C. Myles (2001) Annu. Rep. Med. Chem., 37:125; and Altmann, K.-H. (2001) CWΎ. Opin. Chem. Biol. 5:424). Use of dictyostatin to inhibit cellular proliferation, including in the case of multi-drug resistant cancer, has been described in U.S. Patent No. 6,576,658.
Although dictyostatin has been previously reported, the correct stereochemistry of this product has not previously been determined. The planar structure of this unsaturated 22-membered macrolactone, featuring 11 stereogenic centers, an endocyclic (2Z,4E)-
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 dienoate and a pendant (Z)-diene moiety at C21, was deduced by the Pettit group[1], primarily on the basis of 2D-NMR data. Structural similarities with discodermolide have been notedt4:!. • -- - — .. - -. . .
Unfortunately, evaluation of its antitumor, immunomodulator and other properties has been precluded so far by its very low natural abundance. It has also contributed to the difficulty in determining its relative and absolute configuration. Consequently, there is a need for an efficient process for the total synthesis of dictyostatin and for the relative and absolute configuration of this rare polyketide metabolite to be firmly established. A synthetic approach is disclosed in WO-A-2004/022552. Unfortunately, this was based on a wrong assignment of the relative and absolute configuration of dictyostatin and, furthermore, does not provide a high degree of flexibility that would enable the simple synthesis of a range of dictyostatin derivatives and analogues. Indeed, a particularly desirable aspect of any method for the total synthesis of dictyostatins is for it to be a modular synthetic approach that is flexible, highly convergent and stereocontrolled, which then offers the potential to provide useful quantities of dictyostatin, as well as a range of structural derivatives and analogues to initiate SAR studies.
Objects of the Invention
It is one object of the present invention to provide a sterochemical characterisation of dictyostatin compounds.
It is a further object of the present invention to provide a method for the synthesis of dictyostatin as well as derivatives, analogues and salts thereof.
It is a further object of the present invention to provide novel dictyostatin derivatives and analogues thereof and uses therefor, including the control of cellular proliferation, cytotoxicity against human tumor cells resistant to chemotherapeutic agents, immunomodulation, and the control of inflammation (said uses arise from the role of dictyostatin compounds as tubulin polymerizers and microtubule stabilizers).
It is a further object of the present invention to provide substantially pure dictyostatin.
V: Tandrews/Cambridge UniversityΛVPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 It is yet a further object of the present invention to provide intermediate compounds particularly useful in the synthesis of dictyostatin as well as derivatives, analogues and salts thereof. -
Summary of the Present Invention ~~
These and other objects are satisfied by the methods, compounds and intermediates of the present invention.
Thus, in a first aspect of the present invention there is provided dictyostatin 1 or a salt, derivative or analogue thereof having the stereochemical structure shown in Figures 1 through 4. In particular, there is provided dictyostatin 1 having the following formula (If) or a salt, derivative or analogue thereof:
Figure imgf000009_0001
(If) In a second aspect of the present invention there is provided a method for the synthesis of dictyostatin or an analogue or derivative thereof having the following formula (I):
Figure imgf000009_0002
(I) wherein:
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 each of Ra, Rb, Rc, Rd, Re and Rf is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
R and Rb together and/or R° and Rd together and/or Re and Rf together represent a single bond, a group of formula — CH2- or a group of formula -O-; each of Rs, Rh, R1 and R is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy protecting group, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group, an aryl group and an acyl group;
Rk is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group and an aralkyl group;
Rp and Rm are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
Rp and Rm together represent a single bond or a group of formula -CH2- or -O-;
Rn is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (said alkyl group being optionally substituted with at least one substituent selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom, an aryl group, an acyl group and an alkoxy group), an alkenyl group (said alkenyl group being optionally substituted with at least one substituent selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom, an aryl group, an acyl group and an alkoxy group), an alkynyl group, a dienyl group and an aryl group;
R° is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group and an aralkyl group;
Rq is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group,
V: Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
Rq and Rh together represent a single bond; . - - -
Rr and Rs are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a hydroxy group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, a haloalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
Rr and Rs together represent a single bond or a group of formula -CH2- or -O-;
R* and Ru are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
R* and Ru together represent a single bond or a group of formula -CH2- or -O-, or R* and
Ru together with the 2 carbon atoms to which they are connected form an aryl group; each of Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a group of formula -NR'R" (wherein R' and R" are the same or different and each is a hydrogen atom, an aryl group or an alkyl group), an alkoxy group and a haloalkoxy group; and
X represents a group of formula -O-, a group of formula -CH2- or a group of formula
-NR'-, wherein R' is as defined above; or a salt thereof, said method comprising coupling units of the following formulae (II), (III), (IN) and (V) in any appropriate order, making any necessary changes to the functional groups of the intermediate obtained after each coupling step before performing the next coupling step, subjecting the resulting compound obtained by the coupling of said units of formulae (II),
(III), (IN) and (N) to macrocyclisation and, if necessary, subjecting one or more of the functional groups of the resulting macrocyclised compound to one or more reactions to convert said group or groups to a different desired group or groups to give said compound of formula (I):
V /Tandrews/Cambπdge Umversιty/WPP290192sl PCT descπptton/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29 12 04
Figure imgf000012_0001
wherein:
R1 is a hydrogen atom and R2 is selected from the group consisting of-O-P1 (wherein P1 represents a hydroxy protecting group), a leaving group and a group of formula
-CH2-L (wherein L represents a leaving group), or
R1 and R2 together represent a group of formula =O, =NR' (wherein R' is as defined above), =N-N(R')2 (wherein each R is the same or different and is as defined above), or a group of formula =CHM wherein M is selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom, a triflate, Li, Cu, Si(R')3 (wherein each R' is the same or different and is as defined above), Sn(R')3 (wherein each R' is the same or different and is as defined above),
B(OR')2 (wherein each R' is the same or different and is as defined above), MgR'
(wherein R' is as defined above), Zn, Na and K, and
R16 is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a chiral auxiliary group and a group of formula -CH2-P(R19)3 wherein each R19 is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of =O, an aryl group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
R1, R2 andR16 together with the carbon atom to which they are attached represent an ethynyl group;
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 R3 represents a group selected from a hydroxy protecting group, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group and an aryl group;
R4 represents a group of formula -O-P2 (wherein P2 represents a hydroxy protecting group) or a group of formula P(R19)3 wherein each R19 is the same or different and is as defined above, and R5 represent a hydrogen atom, or
R4 and R5 together represent a group of formula =O or a group of formula =CHM wherein M is as defined above, or a group of formula =CH-C(=O)(CH3), and
R15 represents a hydrogen atom, or
R4, R5 and R15 together with the carbon atom to which they are attached represent an ethynyl group;
R6 is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a leaving group and a group of formula -CH2-P(R19)3 wherein each R19 is the same or different and is as defined above, and
R7 and R8 each represent a hydrogen atom, or R7 and R8 together represent a group of formula =O, =NR' (wherein R' is as defined above) or a dithiane group of formula
-S- CH S- wherein n1 = 3;
R9 represents a group selected from a hydroxy protecting group, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group and an aryl group;
R10 is a hydrogen atom, R11 is a group of formula -O-P3, wherein P3 represents a hydroxy protecting group and R12 is a formyl group, or
R10 is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a leaving group and a group of formula -CH2-P(R19)3 wherein each R19 is the same or different and is as defined above, and R11 and R12 together represent a group of formula =O; n2 is 0 or 1 (if it is 0, the place of the group in brackets is taken by a hydrogen atom);
R13 is selected from the group consisting of a hydroxy protecting group, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group and an aryl group, and
R13 is a hydrogen atom, or
R13 and R13' together represent a single bond;
R14 is a hydrogen atom or a carboxy protecting group;
R17 and R18 are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a
V /Tandrews/Cambπdge Umversit /WPP290192sl PCT descπption/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29 12 04 hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or R17 and R18 together represent a single bond or a group of formula -CH2- or -O-, or R17 and R-- together with the 2- carbon atoms to which they are connected form an aryl group; _ _ . _
Y is selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom, a group of formula Sn(R20)3
(wherein each R20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a group of formula
Si(R20)3 (wherein each R20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group), and a group of formula B(OR21)2 wherein each R21 is the same or different and is an alkyl group or an aryl group;
Z is selected from the group consisting of a group of formula Sn(R20)3. (wherein each R20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a halogen atom and a group of formula
B(OR21)2 wherein each R21 is the same or different and is an alkyl group or an aryl group; and
Rk, Rn, R°, Rr, Rs, Rγ, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz are as defined above.
This method can, for example, be used for the total synthesis of dictyostatin of formula (If) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000014_0001
(If)
In a further aspect of the present invention, there is provided a compound having the following formula (Io) or a salt thereof:
V; Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04
Figure imgf000015_0001
(Io) wherein: each of Ra, Rb, Rc, Rd, Re and Rf is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group; an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
Ra and Rb together and/or Rc and Rd together and/or Re and Rf together represent a single bond, a group of formula -CH2- or a group of formula -O-; each of Rg, Rh, R1 and RJ is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy protecting group, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group, an aryl group and an acyl group;
Rk is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group and an aralkyl group;
Rp and Rm are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
Rp and Rm together represent a single bond or a group of formula -CH2- or -O-;
Rn is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (said alkyl group being optionally substituted with at least one substituent selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom, an aryl group, an acyl group and an alkoxy group), an
V;/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 alkenyl group (said alkenyl group being optionally substituted with at least one substituent selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom, an aryl group, an acyl group and an alkoxy group), an alkynyl group, a dienyl group and an aryl group; .
R° is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group and an aralkyl group;
Rq is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group,
Rr and Rs are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a hydroxy group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
Rr and Rs together represent a single bond or a group of formula -CH2- or -O-;
R* and Ru are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
R* and Ru together represent a single bond or a group of formula -CH2- or -O-, or R* and
Ru together with the 2 carbon atoms to which they are connected form an aryl group; each of Rv, R , Rx, Ry and Rz is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, ,an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a group of formula -NR'R"
(wherein R' and R" are the same or different and each is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), an alkoxy group and a haloalkoxy group; and
X represents a group of formula -O-, a' group of formula -CH2- or a group of formula -
NR', wherein R' is as defined above; or a salt thereof.
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 Further dictyostatins and derivatives, analogues and salts thereof are also provided, as is explained in greater detail below.
Intermediates particularly suitable for use in the methods of the present invention., are also provided, such as the intermediates of formulae (II), (III), (IN) and (N) defined in the method of the present invention as defined above.
The method of the present invention also enables the production for the first time of dictyostatin of formula (If) above in high purity and confirms both the relative and absolute stereochemistry of dictyostatin, and this also forms another aspect of the present invention.
The present invention also provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising an effective amount of a pharmacologically active compound together with a carrier or diluent therefor, wherein said pharmacologically active compound is dictyostatin 1 or a pharmacologically acceptable salt, derivative or analogue thereof having the stereochemical structure shown in Figures 1 through 4.
The present invention also provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising an effective amount of a pharmacologically active compound together with a carrier or diluent therefor, wherein said pharmacologically active compound is a compound of formula (Io) or a pharmacologically acceptable salt thereof as defined above.
The present invention also provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising an effective amount of a pharmacologically active compound together with a carrier or diluent therefor, wherein said pharmacologically active compound is substantially pure dictyostatin of formula (If) or a pharmacologically acceptable salt thereof as defined above.
The present invention also provides a method for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer, said method comprising administering an effective amount of a cytotoxic
V: Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 compound to a patient suffering from said cancer, wherein said cytotoxic compound is dictyostatin 1 or a pharmacologically acceptable salt, derivative or analogue thereof having the stereochemical structure shown in Figures 1 through 4.
The present invention also provides a method for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer, said method comprising administering an effective amount of a cytotoxic compound to a patient suffering from said cancer, wherein said cytotoxic compound is a compound of formula (Io) or a pharmacologically acceptable salt as defined above.
The present invention also provides a method for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer, said method comprising administering an effective amount of a cytotoxic compound to a patient suffering from said cancer, wherein said cytotoxic compound is substantially pure dictyostatin of formula (If) or a pharmacologically acceptable salt thereof as defined above.
The present invention also provides a method for the prophylaxis or treatment of diseases that can be prevented or treated by compounds capable of stabilising microtubules, said method comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a pharmacologically effective amount of a compound of formula (Io) or a pharmacologically acceptable salt as defined above.
The present invention also provides a method for the prophylaxis or treatment of diseases that can be prevented or treated by compounds capable of stabilising microtubules, said method comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a pharmacologically effective amount of dictyostatin 1 or a pharmacologically acceptable salt, derivative or analogue thereof having the stereochemical structure shown in Figures 1 through 4.
The present invention also provides a method for the prophylaxis or treatment of diseases that can be prevented or treated by compounds capable of stabilising microtubules, said method comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 pharmacologically effective amount of substantially pure dictyostatin of formula (If) or a pharmacologically acceptable salt thereof as defined above.
The present invention also provides use of dictyostatin 1 or a pharmacologically acceptable'salt, derivative or analogue thereof having the stereochemical structure shown in Figures 1 through 4 in the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer.
The present invention also provides use of a compound of formula (Io) or a pharmacologically acceptable salt as defined above in the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer.
The present invention also provides use of substantially pure dictyostatin of formula (If) or a pharmacologically acceptable salt thereof as defined above in the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer.
The present invention also provides use of dictyostatin 1 or a pharmacologically acceptable salt, derivative or analogue thereof having the stereochemical structure shown in Figures 1 through 4 in the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of diseases that can be prevented or treated by compounds capable of stabilising microtubules.
The present invention also provides use of a compound of formula (Io) or a pharmacologically acceptable salt as defined above in the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of diseases that can be prevented or treated by compounds capable of stabilising microtubules.
The present invention also provides use of substantially pure dictyostatin of formula (If) or a pharmacologically acceptable salt thereof as defined above in the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of diseases that can be prevented or treated by compounds capable of stabilising microtubules.
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge TJniversity/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch 29.12.04 Detailed Description of the Invention
The first aspect of the present invention provides dictyostatin 1 or a salt, derivative or analogue thereof having the stereochemical structure shown in Figures 1 through 4. This first aspect of the invention provides the first full stereochemical characterization of dictyostatin compounds. Methods of use for these compounds are also provided, including the control of cellular proliferation, cytotoxicity against human tumor cells resistant to chemotherapeutic agents, immunomodulation, and the control of inflammation (said uses arise from the role of dictyostatin compounds as tubulin polymerizers and microtubule stabilizers).
The relative stereochemistry of the 22-membered marine macrolide dictyostatin, a taxol-like antimitotic agent, was determined based on a combination of extensive high field NMR studies, including J-based configuration analysis, and molecular modeling.
The dictyostatin class of compounds can be isolated from Dictyoceratid sponges of the genus Spongia as well as from a lithistid sponge of the family Corallistidae. See U.S. Patent No. 6,576,658, which is incoφorated herein, in its entirety, by reference.
Specifically exemplified herein in the first aspect of the present invention is dictyostatin 1 or a salt, derivative or analogue thereof having the stereochemical structure shown in Figures 1 through 4. In particular, there is provided dictyostatin 1 having formula (If) or a salt, derivative or analogue thereof.
There is also provided the use of dictyostatin 1 or a salt, derivative or analogue thereof having the stereochemical structure shown in Figures 1 through 4, and in particular dictyostatin 1 having formula (If) or a salt, derivative or analogue thereof, for immunomodulation, control of inflammation, stabilization of microtubules, induction of polymerization of tubulin, inhibiting cellular proliferation, and/or inhibiting cellular proliferation of multi-drug resistant tumor cells.
As used in this application, the terms "analogues" and "derivatives" refer to compounds which are substantially the same as another compound but which may have been modified by, for example, adding side groups, oxidation or reduction of the parent structure. Salts are also within the scope of the present invention. Analogues or derivatives of the exemplified compounds can be readily prepared using commonly
V:/Tandrews/Cambπ'dge University/WPP290192sl PCT description CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 known standard reactions. These standard reactions include, but are not limited to, hydrogenation, alkylation, acetylation, and acidification reactions.
The subject invention particularly contemplates - analogues of dictyostatin 1 having the stereochemical_structure shown, in Figures 1 through 4, and in particular dictyostatin 1 having formula (If), that retain the stereochemistry reported herein. Thus, one aspect of the subject invention provides analogues of dictyostatin 1 having the stereochemical structure shown in Figures 1 through 4, and in particular dictyostatin 1 having formula (If), that retain the stereochemistry in any, or all, points in the molecule but differ from natural dictyostation by one or more additions or deletions of side groups. A further aspect of the subject invention is the use of the stereochemistry reported herein, in conjunction with similar information with respect to taxol and/or discodermolide to provide analogues that have the desired anti-proliferative activity.
In further preferred embodiments of the invention, salts within the scope of the invention are made by adding mineral acids, e.g., HCI, H2SO4, or strong organic acids, e.g., formic, oxalic, in appropriate amounts to form the acid addition salt of the parent compound or its derivative. Further suitable salts are detailed below in relation to the compounds of formula (I).
As stated above, the full stereochemical assignment for the antimitotic macrolide dictyostatin is proposed as (If) (2Z,4E, 6R,7S,9S,12S,13R,14S,16S,19R,20S,21S,22S,23Z), based on the results of extensive high field NMR studies, including J-based configuration analysis, and molecular modelling. This assignment is consistent with a common biogenesis for discodermolide and suggests that both these sponge-derived polyketides interact in a similar fashion (Shin, N. Choy, R. Balachandran, C. Madiraju, B. W. Day and D. P. Curran (2002) Org. Lett. 4: 4443) with the taxol binding site on tubulin. Unfortunately, evaluation of the antitumor, immunomodulator and other properties of dictyostatin has been precluded so far by its very low natural abundance, and it has also contributed to the difficulty in determining its relative and absolute configuration. Consequently, there is a need for an efficient process for the total synthesis of dictyostatin and for confirmation of the relative and absolute configuration as discussed above to be confirmed.
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge Unrversity/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.1204 Thus, in a second aspect of the present invention there is provided a method for the synthesis of dictyostatin or an analogue or derivative thereof having the following formula (I): - ~"~~ -"-"""" -
Figure imgf000022_0001
(I) wherein: each of Ra, Rb, Rc, Rd, Re and Rf is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
Ra and Rb together and/or Rc and Rd together and/or Re and Rf together represent a single bond, a group of formula -CH2- or a group of formula -O-; each of Rg, Rh, R1 and RJ is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy protecting group, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group, an aryl group and an acyl group;
Rk is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group and an aralkyl group;
Rp and Rm are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
V:/Tandre s/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 Rp and Rm together represent a single bond or a group of formula -CH2- or -O-;
Rn is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (said alkyl group being optionally substituted with at least one substituent selected from the group - consisting of a halogen atom, an aryl group, an acyl group and an alkoxy group), an alkenyl group (said alkenyl group being optionally substituted with at least one substituent selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom, an aryl group, an acyl group and an alkoxy group), an alkynyl group, a dienyl group and an aryl group;
R° is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group and an aralkyl group;
Rq is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
Rq and Rh together represent a single bond;
Rr and Rs are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a hydroxy group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, a haloalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
Rr and Rs together represent a single bond or a group of formula -CH2- or -O-;
R*and Ru are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
R1 and Ru together represent a single bond or a group of formula -CH2- or -O-, or R* and
Ru together with the 2 carbon atoms to which they are connected form an aryl group; each of Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a group of formula -NR'R" (wherein R' and R" are
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 the same or different and each is a hydrogen atom, an aryl group or an alkyl group), an alkoxy group and a haloalkoxy group; and
X represents a group of formula -O-, a group of formula -CH2- or a group of formula
-NR'-, wherein R is as defined above; or a salt thereof, said method comprising coupling units of the following formulae (II), (III), (IN) and (V) in any appropriate order, making any necessary changes to the functional groups of the intermediate obtained after each coupling step before performing the next coupling step, subjecting the resulting compound obtained by the coupling of said units of formulae (II),
(III), (IV) and (V) to macrocyclisation and, if necessary, subjecting one or more of the functional groups of the resulting macrocyclised compound to one or more reactions to convert said group or groups to a different desired group or groups to give said compound of formula (I):
Figure imgf000024_0001
wherein:
R1 is a hydrogen atom and R2 is selected from the group consisting of-O-P1 (wherein P1 represents a hydroxy protecting group), a leaving group and a group of formula -CH2-L (wherein L represents a leaving group), or
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 R1 and R2 together represent a group of formula =O, =NR' (wherein R' is as defined above), =N-N(R')2 (wherein each R' is the same or different and is as defined above), or a group of formula =CHM wherein M is selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom, a triflate, Li, Cu, Si(R')3 (wherein each R is the same or different and is as defined above), Sn(R')3 (wherein each R' is the same or different and is as defined above), B(OR')2 (wherein each R is the same or different and is as defined above), Mg (wherein R' is as defined above), Zn,TSfa and K, and
R16 is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a chiral auxiliary group and a group of formula -CH2-P(R19)3 wherein each R19 is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of =O, an aryl group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or R1, R2 and R16 together with the carbon atom to which they are attached represent an ethynyl group;
R3 represents a group selected from a hydroxy protecting group, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group and an aryl group;
R4 represents a group of formula -O-P2 (wherem P2 represents a hydroxy protecting group) or a group of formula P(R19)3 wherein each R19 is the same or different and is as defined above, and R5 represent a hydrogen atom, or
R4 and R5 together represent a group of formula =O or a group of formula =CHM wherein M is as defined above, or a group of formula =CH-C(= )(CH3), and
R15 represents a hydrogen atom, or
R4, R5 and R15 together with the carbon atom to which they are attached represent an ethynyl group;
R6 is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a leaving group and a group of formula -CH2-P(R19)3 wherein each R19 is the same or different and is as defined above, and
R7 and R8 each represent a hydrogen atom, or R7 and R8 together represent a group of formula =O, =NR' (wherein R' is as defined above) or a dithiane group of formula
-S-(CH2)n 1-S- wherein n1 = 3;
R9 represents a group selected from a hydroxy protecting group, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group and an aryl group;
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge Universir /WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 R10 is a hydrogen atom, R11 is a group of formula -O-P3, wherein P3 represents a hydroxy protecting group and R12 is a formyl group, or
R10 is selected from the" group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a leaving group and a - group of formula -CH2-P(R19)3 wherein each R19 is the same or different and is as defined above, and Rn and R12 together represent a group of formula =O; n2 is 0 or 1 (if it is 0, the place of the group in brackets is taken by a hydrogen atom); R13 is selected from the group consisting of a hydroxy protecting group, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group and an aryl group, and
1 V
R is a hydrogen atom, or
R13 and R13' together represent a single bond;
R14 is a hydrogen atom or a carboxy protecting group;
R17 and R18 are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or R17 and R18 together represent a single bond or a group of formula -CH2- or -O-, or R17 and R18 together with the 2 carbon atoms to which they are connected form an aryl group;
Y is selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom, a group of formula Sn(R20)3
(wherein each R20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a group of formula
Si(R20)3 (wherein each R20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group), and a group of formula B(OR21)2 wherein each R21 is the same or different and is an alkyl group or an aryl group;
Z is selected from the group consisting of a group of formula Sn(R20)3 (wherein each R20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a halogen atom and a group of formula
B(OR21)2 wherein each R21 is the same or different and is an alkyl group or an aryl group; and
Rk, Rn, R°, Rr, Rs, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz are as defined above.
This method can, for example, be used for the total synthesis of dictyostatin of formula (If) or a salt thereof:
V: Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12 04
Figure imgf000027_0001
___ (if)
The synthesis of said dictyostain of formula (If) and comparison of the NMR data obtained therefor with that of naturally obtained dictyostatin 1 have enabled the inventors to confirm that naturally obtained dictyostatin 1 does indeed have the stereochemistry shown in formula (If). Furthermore, it has enabled the inventors to show that the absolute configuration of dictyostatin 1 is (-)-dictyostatin of formula (If), and (-)- dictyostatin of formula (I) or- a sahy analogue or derivative thereof also" forrrTapart'of the- present invention.
The alkyl groups in the definitions of substituents Ra, Rb, Rc, Rd, Re, Rf, Rg, Rh, R1, Rj, Rk, Rp, Rm, Rn, R°, Rq, Rr, Rs, R RU, RV, Rw, RX, Ry, Rz, R, R", R3, R6, R9, R13, R16, R17, R18, R19, R20 and R21 above are straight or branched alkyl groups having from 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Examples of said lower alkyl groups include methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, s-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, isopentyl, 2-methylbutyl, neopentyl, 1-ethylpropyl, n-hexyl, isohexyl, 4-methylpentyl, 3-methylpentyl, 2- methylpentyl, 1-methylpentyl, 3,3-dimethylbutyl, 2,2-dimethylbutyl, 1,1-dimethylbutyl, 1,2-dimethylbutyl, 1,3-dimethylbutyl, 2,3-dimethylbutyl and 2-ethylbutyl groups. Alkyl groups having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms are preferred, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl and butyl groups are more preferred, and methyl, ethyl and propyl groups are most preferred. For Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz, methyl groups are particularly preferred.
The alkenyl groups in the definitions of Ra, Rb, Rc, Rd, Re, R , Rk, Rp, Rm, Rn, R°, Rq, Rr, RS, R4, RU, RV, RW, RX, Ry, Rz, R17 and R18 above are straight or branched alkenyl groups having from 2 to 6 carbon atoms. Examples of said alkenyl groups include vinyl, 2-propenyl, l-methyl-2-propenyl, 2-methyl-2-propenyl, 2-ethyl-2-propenyl, 2-butenyl, 1- methyl-2-butenyl, 2-methyl-2-butenyl, l-ethyl-2-butenyl, 3-butenyl, l-methyl-3-butenyl, 2-methyl-3-butenyl, l-ethyl-3-butenyl, 2-pentenyl, l-methyl-2-pentenyl, 2-methyl-2- pentenyl, 3-pentenyl, l-methyl-3-pentenyl, 2-methyl-3-pentenyl, 4-pentenyl, l-methyl-4-
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch 29.12.04 pentenyl, 2-methyl-4-pentenyl, 2-hexenyl, 3-hexenyl, 4-hexenyl and 5-hexenyl groups. Alkenyl groups having from 2 to 4 carbon atoms are preferred, and alkenyl groups having 2 or 3 carbon atoms are most preferred.
The alkynyl groups in the definitions of Ra, Rb, Rc, Rd, Re, Rf, Rk, Rp, Rm, Rn, R°, Rq, Rr, Rs, R Ru, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry, Rz, R17 and R18 above are straight or branched alkynyl groups having from 2 to 6 carbon atoms. Examples of said alkynyl groups include ethynyl, 2-propynyl, 1 -methyl -2-propynyl, 2-butynyl, l-methyl-2-butynyl, l-ethyl-2-- butynyl, 3-butynyl, l-methyl-3-butynyl, 2-methyl-3-butynyl, l-ethyl-3-butynyl, 2- pentynyl, l-methyl-2-pentynyl, 3-pentynyl, l-methyl-3 -pentynyl, 2-methyl-3-pentynyl, 4- pentynyl, l-methyl-4-pentynyl, 2-methyl-4-pentynyl, 2-hexynyl, 3-hexynyl, 4-hexynyl and 5-hexynyl groups. Alkynyl groups having from 2 to 4 carbon atoms are preferred, and alkynyl groups having 2 or 3 carbon atoms are most preferred.
The dienyl group in the definition of Rn is a straight or branched dienyl group having from 4 to 10 carbon atoms. Preferred are groups having from 4 to 6 carbon atoms and 1,3-butadienyl groups are particularly preferred.
The halogen atoms in the definitions of Ra, Rb, Rc, Rd, Re, Rf, Rp, Rm, Rn, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry, Rz, Y and Z above include fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine atoms.
The haloalkyl groups in the definitions of Ra, Rb, Rc, Rd, Re, Rf, Rk, Rp, Rm, R°, Rq, Rr, Rs, R Ru, Rv, Rw, Rx, R , Rz, R17 and R18 above are alkyl groups as defined and exemplified above which are substituted with at least one halogen atom as exemplified above. It is preferably a straight or branched halogenoalkyl group having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, examples of which include a trifluoromethyl, trichlorom ethyl, difluoromethyl, dichloromethyl, dibromomethyl, fluoromethyl, 2,2,2-trichloroethyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, 2-bromoethyl, 2-chloroethyl, 2-fluoroethyl and 2,2-dibromoethyl groups.
The alkoxy groups in the definitions of Ra, Rb, Rc, Rd, Re, Rf, Rp, Rm, Rn, Rq, Rr, Rs, R\ Ru, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry, Rz, R17, R18and R19 above are alkyl groups as defined and exemplified above which are bonded to an oxygen atom. The alkoxy groups are preferably straight or branched alkoxy groups having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, such as methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, isopropoxy and butoxy groups.
The haloalkoxy groups in the definitions of Ra, Rb, Rc, Rd, Re, Rf, Rp, Rm, Rq, Rr,
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 Rs, R Ru, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry, Rz, R17, R18 and R19 above are alkoxy groups as defined above that are substituted with at least one halogen atom as exemplified above. The haloalkoxy groups preferably have from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, such as difluoromefhoxy, trifluoromethoxy and 2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy groups.
The alkoxyalkyl groups in the definitions of Ra, Rb, Rc, Rd, Re, Rf, Rk, Rp, Rm, R°, Rq, Rr, Rs, R*. Ru, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry, Rz, R17 and R18 above are alkyl groups as defined and exemplified above that are substituted with at least one alkoxy group as defined and exemplified above. Methoxymethyl, ethoxyethyl groups, groups, 1-methoxyethyl groups and 1 -ethoxyethyl groups are particularly preferred.
The aryl groups in the definitions of Ra, R , Rc, Rd, Re, Rf, R8, Rh, R1, Rj, Rk, Rp, Rm, Rn, R°, Rq, Rr, Rs, R1, Ru, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry, Rz, R3, R9, R13, R17, R18, R19 and R21 above are aryl groups that may optionally be substituted with at least one substituent selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a group of formula -NR'R" (wherein R' and R" are the same or different and each is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), an alkoxy group and a haloalkoxy group, said aryl groups being aromatic hydrocarbon groups having from 6 to 14 carbon atoms in one or more rings, preferably from 6 to 10 carbon atoms, and examples include phenyl, naphthyl, phenanthryl and anthracenyl groups. Of these, we prefer phenyl and naphthyl groups, most preferably phenyl groups.
The aryl groups defined and exemplified above may be fused with a cycloalkyl group having from 3 to 10 carbon atoms. Examples of such a fused ring group include 5- indanyl groups.
Where the aryl groups are substituted, we prefer those that are substituted with from 1 to 4 substituents selected from the group above. Examples of such substituted aryl groups include 4-fluorophenyl, 3 -fluorophenyl, 4-chlorophenyl, 3-chlorophenyl, 3,4- difluorophenyl, 3,4-dichlorophenyl, 3,4,5-trifluorophenyl, 3-chloro-4-fluorophenyl, 3- difluoromethoxyphenyl, 3-trifluoromethoxyphenyl and 3-trifluoromethylphenyl.
The aralkyl groups in the definitions of Ra, Rb, Rc, Rd, Re, Rf, Rs, Rh, R Rj, Rk, Rp, Rm, R°, Rq, Rr, RS, Rl, RU, RV, RW, RX, Ry, Rz, R3, R9, R13, R17 and R18 above are alkyl groups as defined above that are substituted by at least one aryl group as defined and
V: Tandrews/Cambridge Universit /WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch 29.12.04 exemplified above. Examples of such an aralkyl group include benzyl, indenylmethyl, phenanthrylmethyl, anthrylmethyl, α-naphthylmethyl, β-naphthylmethyl, diphenylmethyir friphenylmethryl α-nIphthyldipKenyi ethyl, 9-anthrylmethyl, piperonyl, 1-phenethyl, 2-phenethyl, 1-naphthylethyl, 2-naphthyletitιyl, 1-phenylpropyl, 2- phenylpropyl, 3-phenylpropyl, 1-naphthylpropyl, 2-naphthylpropyl, 3-naphthylpropyl, 1- phenylbutyl, 2-phenylbutyl, 3-phenylbutyl, 4-phenylbutyl, 1-naphthylbutyl, 2- naphthylbutyl, 3-naphthylbutyl, 4-naphthylbutyl, 1-phenylpentyl, 2-phenylpentyl, 3- phenylpentyl, 4-phenylpentyl, 5-phenylpentyl, 1-naphthylpentyl, 2-naphthylpentyl, 3- naphthylpentyl, 4-naphthylpentyl, 5-naphthylpenthyl, 1-phenylhexyl, 2-phenylhexyl, 3- phenylhexyl, 4-phenylhexyl, 5-phenylhexyl, 6-phenylhexyl, 1 -naphthylhexyl, 2- naphthylhexyl, 3-naphthylhexyl, 4-naphthylhexyl, 5-naphthylhexyl and 6-naphthylhexyl.
Of these, benzyl, phenanthrylmethyl, anthrylmethyl, o^aphΛylmethyl, β- naphthylmethyl, diphenylmethyl, triphenylmethyl, 9-anthrylmethyl, piperonyl, 1- phenethyl, 2-phenethyl, 1-phenylpropyl, 2-phenylpropyl, 3-phenylpropyl, 1-phenylbutyl, 2-phenylbutyl, 3-phenylbutyl and 4-phenylbutyl are preferred.
The aryloxy groups in the definitions of Ra, Rb, Rc, Rd, Re, Rf, Rp, Rm, Rq, Rr, R\ R*, Ru, R17, R18 and R19 above are aryl groups as defined and exemplified above that are bonded to an oxygen atom. Examples include phenoxy, naphthyloxy, phenanthryloxy and anthracenyloxy groups.
The acyl groups in the definitions of Rg, Rh, R1, RJ and Rn are selected from aliphatic acyl groups, aromatic acyl groups and alkoxycarbonyl groups as defined and exemplified below:
(i) aliphatic acyl groups, examples of which include alkylcarbonyl groups having from 1 to 25 carbon atoms, examples of which include formyl, acetyl, propionyl, butyryl, isobutyryl, pentanoyl, pivaloyl, valeryl, isovaleryl, octanoyl, nonanoyl, decanoyl, 3-methylnonanoyl, 8-methylnonanoyl, 3-ethyloctanoyl, 3,7-dimethyloctanoyl, undecanoyl, dodecanoyl, tridecanoyl, tetradecanoyl, pentadecanoyl, hexadecanoyl, 1-methylpentadecanoyl, 14-methyl- pentadecanoyl, 13,13-dimethyltetradecanoyl, heptadecanoyl, 15-methylhexadecanoyl, octadecanoyl, 1-methylheptadecanoyl, nonadecanoyl, eicosanoyl and heneicosanoyl groups,
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 halogenated alkylcarbonyl groups having from 1 to 25 carbons in which the alkyl moiety thereof is substituted by at least one halogen atom, examples of which include chloroacetyl, dichloroacetyl, trichloroacetyl and trifluoroacetyl groups, alkoxyalkylcarbonyl groups which comprise an alkylcarbonyl group having from 1 to 25 carbon atoms in which the alkyl moiety thereof is substituted with at least one alkoxy group as defined above, examples of said alkoxyalkylcarbonyl groups including methoxyacetyl groups, and - - — - unsaturated alkylcarbonyl groups having from 1 to 25 carbon atoms, examples of which include acryloyl, propioloyl, methacryloyl, crotonoyl, isocrotonoyl and (E)-2- methyl-2-butenoyl groups; of these, alkylcarbonyl groups having from 1 to 6 carbon atoms are preferred and acetyl groups are particularly preferred;
(ii) aromatic acyl groups, examples of which include arylcarbonyl groups which comprise a carbonyl group which is substituted with an aryl group as defined above, examples of which include benzoyl, α-naphthoyl and β-naphthoyl groups, halogenated arylcarbonyl groups which comprise an arylcarbonyl group as defined above which is substituted with at least one halogen atom, examples of which include 2-bromobenzoyl, 4-chlorobenzoyl and 2,4,6-trifluorobenzoyl groups, alkylated arylcarbonyl groups which comprise an arylcarbonyl group as defined above which is substituted with at least one alkyl group as defined above, examples of which include 2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl and 4-toluoyl groups, alkoxylated arylcarbonyl groups which comprise an arylcarbonyl group as defined above which is substituted with at least one alkoxy group as defined above, examples of which include 4-anisoyl groups, nitrated arylcarbonyl groups which comprise an arylcarbonyl group as defined above which is substituted with at least one nitro group, examples of which include 4- nitrobenzoyl and 2-nitrobenzoyl groups, alkoxycarbonylated arylcarbonyl groups which comprise an arylcarbonyl group as defined above which is substituted with a carbonyl group which is itself substituted with
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 an alkoxy group as defined above, examples of which include 2- (methoxycarbonyl)benzoyl groups, and- arylated arylcarbonyl groups which comprise an arylcarbonyl group as defined above which is substituted with at least one aryl group as defined above, examples of which include 4-phenylbenzoyl groups;
(iii) alkoxycarbonyl groups, examples of which include alkoxycarbonyl groups Which comprise a carbonyl group substituted with an- - alkoxy group as defined above, examples of which include methoxycarbonyl, ethoxycarbonyl, propoxycarbonyl, butoxycarbonyl, s-butoxy-carbonyl, t-butoxycarbonyl and isobutoxycarbonyl groups, and alkoxycarbonyl groups as defined above which are substituted with at least one substituent selected from the group consisting of halogen atoms and trialkylsilyl groups
(wherein said alkyl groups are as defined above), examples of which include 2,2,2- trichloroethoxycarbonyl and 2-trimethylsilylethoxycarbonyl groups.
The hydroxy protecting groups in the definitions of Rs, Rh, R\ Rj, P1, P2, P3, R3'R! and R13 above are not particularly limited provided that they can protect a hydroxy group in a reaction. Such a protecting group is a group which can be removed by a chemical reaction such as hydrogenolysis, hydrolysis, electrolysis and photolysis and may be, for example, an aliphatic acyl group, examples of which include an alkylcarbonyl group such as a formyl group, an acetyl group, a propionyl group, a butyryl group, an isobutyryl group, a pentanoyl group, a pivaloyl group, a valeryl group or an isovaleryl group, an alkoxyalkylcarbonyl group such as a methoxyacetyl group, or an unsaturated alkylcarbonyl group such as an (E)-2-methyl-2-butenoyl group; an aromatic acyl group, examples of which include an arylcarbonyl group such as a benzoyl group, an α- naphthoyl group or a β-naphthoyl group, a halogenated arylcarbonyl group such as a 2- bromobenzoyl group or a 4-chlorobenzoyl group, an alkylated arylcarbonyl group such as a 2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl group or a 4-toluoyl group, an alkoxy arylcarbonyl group such as an 4-anisoyl group, a nitrated arylcarbonyl group such as a 4-nitrobenzoyl group or a 2-nitrobenzoyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl arylcarbonyl group such as a 2- (methoxycarbonyl)benzoyl group or an arylated arylcarbonyl group such as a 4- phenylbenzoyl group; an alkyl group as defined above such as a methyl group, an ethyl
V:/Tandre s/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group or a t-butyl group; an unsaturated alkyl group such as a vinyl group, an allyl group or a 2-butenyl group; an alkoxyalkyl group as defined above such as a methoxymethyl group and an ethoxyethyl group; a tetrahydropyranyl group; a tetrahydrofuranyl group; an alkoxyalkoxyalkyl group such as a methoxyethoxymethyl group; a benzyl group optionally substituted with an alkyl group as defined above, an alkoxy group as defined above or a halogen atom such as a benzyl group, a 4-methylbenzyl group, a 4-methoxybenzyl group or a 4-chlorobenzyl group; and a tri-substituted silyl group substituted with an alkyl group as defined above or a phenyl group such as a tert-butyldimethylsilyl group, a tert-butyldiphenylsilyl group or a triphenylsilyl group. Protection of a hydroxy group with the above described protecting groups or removal of these protecting groups can be accomplished according to standard methods (described in, for example, T.H. Green et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, JOHN WILEY & SONS, INC).
The carboxy protecting group in the definition of R14 above are not particularly limited provided that they can protect a carboxy group in a reaction. Such a protecting group is a group which can be removed by a chemical reaction such as hydrogenolysis, hydrolysis, electrolysis and photolysis and may be, for example, an alkyl group as defined and exemplified above; an alkenyl group as defined and exemplified above; an alkynyl group as defined and exemplified above; a haloalkyl group as defined and exemplified above; a hydroxyalkyl group such as a 2-hydroxyethyl, 2,3-dihydroxypropyl, 3-hydroxypropyl, 3,4-dihydroxybutyl or 4-hydroxybutyl group; an "aliphatic acyl"-"alkyl group" such as an acetylmethyl group; an aralkyl group as defined and exemplified above; and a tri-substituted silyl group substituted with an alkyl group as defined above or a phenyl group such as a tert-butyldimethylsilyl group, a tert-butyldiphenylsilyl group or a triphenylsilyl group.
The leaving groups in the definitions of L and R10 are not particularly limited provided that they can be substituted in a reaction by a nucleophilic reagent. Suitable leaving groups include, for example, a hydroxy group; a halogen atom as described above; an alkylsulfonyloxy group such as a methanesulfonyloxy group or an ethanesulfonyloxy group; a halogenated alkylsulfonyloxy group such as a trifluoromethanesulfonyloxy group; an aromatic sulfonyloxy group, which is for
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge Universiry/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 example, an arylsulfonyloxy group such as a benzenesulfonyloxy group, an alkylated arylsulfonyloxy group such as a p-toluenesulfonyloxy group, or a halogenated — arylsulfonyloxy group such as a p-chlorobenzenesulfonyloxy group. Preferably, the "~ leaving group L in the definitions of L and R10 is a halogen atom, a trifluoromethanesulfonyloxy group (a triflate group) or a methanesulfonyloxy group (a mesylate group).
Where the compounds of formula (I) of the present invention have an acidic or basic group, they can form a salt and these are also encompassed within the scope of the present invention. Where the compound of formula (I) is to be used as an anti-cancer agent, any such salt should be a pharmacologically acceptable salt.
Preferred examples of the salt formed with an acidic group include alkali metal salts such as a sodium salt, potassium salt or lithium salt, alkaline earth metal salts such as a calcium salt or magnesium salt, metal salts such as an aluminum salt or iron salt; amine salts, e.g., inorganic salts such as an ammonium salt and organic salts such as a t- octylamine salt, dibenzylamine salt, morpholine salt, glucosamine salt, phenylglycine alkyl ester salt, ethylenediamine salt, N-methylglucamine salt, guanidine salt, diethylamine salt, triethylamine salt, dicyclohexylamine salt, N,N'- dibenzylethylenediamine salt, chloroprocaine salt, procaine salt, diethanolamine salt, N- benzylphenethylamine salt, piperazine salt, tetramethylammonium salt or tris(hydroxymethyl)aminomethane salt; and amino acid salts such as a glycine salt, lysine salt, arginine salt, ornithine salt, glutamate or aspartate.
Preferred examples of the salt formed with a basic group include hydro-halides such as a hydrofluoride, hydrochloride, hydrobromide or hydroiodide, inorganic acid salts such as a nitrate, perchlorate, sulfate or phosphate; lower alkanesulfonates such as a methanesulfonate, trifluoromethanesulfonate or ethanesulfonate, arylsulfonates such as a benzenesulfonate or p-toluenesulfonate, organic acid salts such as an acetate, malate, fumarate, succinate, citrate, ascorbate, tartrate, oxalate or maleate; and amino acid salts such as a glycine salt, lysine salt, arginine salt, ornithine salt, glutamate or aspartate.
If the compounds of the present invention are allowed to stand in the atmosphere for some time, they sometimes absorb water to form a hydrate. Such a hydrate is also embraced in the present invention.
V:/Tandrews/CambridgeUniversity/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 The compounds of the present invention such as those of formulae (I), (II), (III), (IV) and (V) contain a number of asymmetric centres, and can therefore form optical __ isomers (including diastereoisomers). For the broadest definitions of the compounds of the present invention, such as in formulae (I), (II), (III), (IV) and (V), each of said isomers and mixtures of said isomers are depicted by a single formula. Accordingly, the present invention covers both the individual isomers and mixtures thereof in any proportion, including racemic mixtures. - - - - . _. .
(1) The method for the synthesis of dictyostatin or a derivative thereof having the formula (I) or a salt thereof as defined, above is particularly effective for the synthesis of the desired dictyostatins and analogues and derivatives thereof. Preferred examples of the method of the present invention include the following:
(2) A method according to (1), wherein said compound of formula (I) is a compound of formula (la) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000035_0001
(la)
(3) A method according to (1), wherein said compound of formula (I) is a compound of formula (lb) or a salt thereof:
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04
Figure imgf000036_0001
(4) A method according to (1), wherein said compound of formula (I) is a compound of formula (Ic) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000036_0002
(5) A method according to (1), wherein said compound of formula (I) is a compound of formula (Id) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000036_0003
(Id)
(6) A method according to any one of (1) to (5), wherein Rk is a methyl group.
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 (7) A method according to any one of (1) to (6), wherein each of Rp and R represents a hydrogen atom.
(8) A method according to (1), for the synthesis of dictyostatin having the following formula (Ie) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000037_0001
(Ie)
(9) A method according to (1), for the synthesis of dictyostatin having the following formula (If) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000037_0002
(If)
(10) A particularly preferred method according to (1), comprises the following steps:
(a) coupling of a compound of formula (Ila) and a compound of formula (Ilia)
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge Universiry/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04
Figure imgf000038_0001
wherein each of said groups of formula R19a are the same or different and represents an alkoxy group or a haloalkoxy group, to give a compound of formula (VI):
Figure imgf000038_0002
(b) converting the double bond of the enone of said compound of formula (VI) to a single bond and reducing the carbonyl group thereof to a protected hydroxyl group of formula -OP4 to give a group of formula (VII):
Figure imgf000038_0003
(c) deprotecting the group -OP2 to give a hydroxyl group and then oxidising the resulting hydroxyl group to give a compound of formula (VTIf):
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04
Figure imgf000039_0001
(d) coupling the compound of formula (VIII) with a compound of formula (IVa):
Figure imgf000039_0002
(IVa) wherein Y1 is~a HalόgerTatόm, a grdϊφ of fomiύla Sή(R20)3 (wherein each R20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a group of formula Si(R20)3 (wherein each R20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group), or a group of formula B(OR21)2 wherein each R21 is the same or different and is an alkyl group or an aryl group, to give a compound of formula (IX):
Figure imgf000039_0003
(e) coupling said compound of formula (IX) with a compound of formula (Va):
V:/Tandre s/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04
Figure imgf000040_0001
(Va)
to give a compound of formula (X):
Figure imgf000040_0002
(f) subjecting said compound of formula (X) to a macrolactonisation reaction to give a compound of formula (XI):
Figure imgf000040_0003
(g) reducing the ketone group at the C-9 position to a hydroxyl group to give a compound of formula (Ig) or a salt thereof:
V: Tandre s/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04
Figure imgf000041_0001
__ __ . .
(h) and, if desired, removing any protecting groups R3, R13 and P4 from said compound of formula (Ig) to give hydroxyl groups and/or converting one or more of said groups and the hydroxyl group at the C-9 position to other functional groups of formulae Rg, R1, R" and Rh respectively to give a compound of formula (Hi) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000041_0002
In method (10) above, P4 is a hydroxy-protecting group and is not particularly limited provided that it can protect a hydroxy group in a reaction. Such a protecting group is a group which can be removed by a chemical reaction such as hydrogenolysis, hydrolysis, electrolysis and photolysis. Examples of such a protecting group are as given for protecting groups P1, P2 and P3 above. All other groups are as defined and exemplified previously. Preferred methods according to method (10) include:
(11) A method according to (10), wherein said coupling step (a) is performed under Horner-Wadsworth-Emmons olefination conditions.
V: Tandre s/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 (12) A method according to (10) or (11), wherein said coupling step (d) is performed under Still-Gennari Homer Wadsworth-Emmons olefination conditions, the group of formula P(R19)3 in said compound of formula (IVa) being a group of formula P(O)(OR19a) wherein each of said groups of formula OR19a is the same or different and represent an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group or a haloalkoxy group (preferably a 2,2,2- trifluoroethoxy group).
(13) A method according to any one of (10) to (12), wherein said coupling step (e) is performed under Liebeskind or Stille coupling conditions, the substituent R14 being a trialkylsilyl group (preferably a triisopropylsilyl group) and each substituent R20 being an n-butyl group in said compound of formula (Va).
(14) A method according to any one of (10) to (13), wherein said macrolactonisation step (f) is performed under Yamaguchi conditions.
(15) A method according to any one of (10) to (14), wherein the reduction of the C-9 carbonyl group is conducted under Luche conditions using sodium borohydride and caesium trichloride.
(16) A method according to any one of (10) to (15) for the synthesis of a compound of formula (Ih) or a salt thereof, wherein each of R°, Rr and Rs is the same or different and is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group (preferably each is a hydrogen atom).
(17) A method according to any one of ( 10) to ( 16) for the synthesis of a compound of formula (Hi) or a salt thereof, wherein each of Rk, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group and an aralkyl group.
(18) A method according to (17) for the synthesis of a compound of formula (Hi) or a salt thereof, wherein each of Rk, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz is the same or different and is an alkyl group.
V:/Tandrews/CambridgeUniversity/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 (19) A method according to ( 18) for the synthesis of a compound of formula (Ih) or a - salt thereof, wherein each of Rk, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz is a methyl group.
(20) A method according to any one of ( 10) to ( 19) for the synthesis of a compound of formula (Ih) or a salt thereof, wherein each of Rg, Rh, R1 and Rj is the same or different and is selected the group consisting~of a hydrogen- atom.7 an'alkyl group,- an aralkyl group,- an aryl group, an alkylcarbonyl group, a haloalkylcarbonyl group, an arylcarbonyl group and a trialkylsilyl group.
(21) A method according to (20) for the synthesis of a compound of formula (Ih) or a salt thereof, wherein each of Rg, Rh, R1 and Rj is a hydrogen atom.
(22) A method according to any one of (10) to (21) for the synthesis of a compound of formula (Ih) or a salt thereof, wherein each of R17 and R18 is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group or an aryl group, or R and R together with the 2 carbon atoms to which they are connected form an aryl group.
(23) A method according to (22) for the synthesis of a compound of formula (Ih), wherein each of R17 and R18 is a hydrogen atom.
(24) A method according to (10) for the synthesis of a compound of formula (Ii) or a salt thereof:
V:/Tandre s/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04
Figure imgf000044_0001
(Ii)
(25) A method according to (10) for the synthesis of a compound of formula (Ij) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000044_0002
(Ij)
(26) A method according to (10) for the synthesis of a compound of formula (If) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000044_0003
(If) The approach adopted in the method of (10) to (26) above is outlined retrosynthetically in Schemes 1 to 5 below, using the compound of formula (If) as an
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 example. The late stage reduction of the enone 2 is controlled by the macrocyclic conformation adopted by the 22-membered ring.
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge Universiry/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 Scheme 1 Retrosynthetic analysis for dictyostatin (If).
Figure imgf000046_0001
3' C-C 'io subunit 5
Figure imgf000046_0002
V:Tandre s/CambridgeUniversity/WPP290192sl PCT descriptionCUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 The (lOZ)-olefin in 2' is produced via a coupling reaction, preferably a Still- Gennari-type olefination between the β-keto phosphonate 3' and aldehyde 4'; in conjunction with further coupling reaction, preferably a Stille cross-coupling using vinyl stannane 5 to deliver the (2Z,4E)-dienoate. In principle, either of these two reactions could be employed to close the macrocycle, as an alternative to a more conventional Yamaguchi- macrolactonization, - offering considerable flexibility- in . the_ synthesis endgame. In turn, the Cιι-C26 subunit 4' is accessible via a coupling reaction, preferably a Horner-Wadsworth-Emmons (HWE) coupling, between aldehyde 6' and phosphonate 7, containing the terminal (Z)-diene. As these latter segments share a common stereochemical triad, it was anticipated that both 6 and 7 could be prepared from common intermediate 8, available in multigram quantities using efficient aldol methodology reported previously.'-8-'
V: Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 Scheme 2 Synthesis of C1 1-C26 subunit 4',
Figure imgf000048_0001
In the above, TBS is a tert-butyldimethylsilyl group and PMB is a p- methoxybenzyl group
Synthesis of the Cn-C 6 subunit 4', as shown in Scheme 2, commences with conversion of 1,3-diol 8 into bis-TBS ether 9 and liberation of the primary hydroxyl
V:/Tandrews/CambridgeUniversity/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS &. Harbor Branch/29.12.04 group under mildly acidic conditions. The resulting alcohol 10 is readily converted into iodide 11 via a modified Mitsunobu protocol (PPh3, 12, Imid.).'9] Subsequent alkylation of the lithium enolate of Myers' propionamide 12[10-' effects a three carbon homologation, delivering 13 with excellent diastereoselectivity and yield (19:1 dr, 88%).'11] Reductive removal of the pseudoephedrine auxiliary (LiNH2BH3)1-10-' affords a primary alcohol which is, in turn, oxidized with Dess-Martin periodinane to provide aldehyde 6'. The synthesis of HWE coupling- partner-7- is achieved by addition of (MeO)2P(O)CH2Li to aldehyde 14, prepared from 1,3-diol 8 as described previously, f9'12-' delivering, after careful work-up, an epimeric mixture of alcohols, which is converted into β-keto phosphonate 7 (Dess-Martin periodinane, 83% over 2 steps). Following a HWE coupling between aldehyde 6' and phosphonate 7, employing Ba(OH)2 in wet THF, enone 15 is isolated in 92% yield.'13-1 With the entire Cπ-C26 backbone assembled, stereocontrolled reduction of the C1 ketone directed by the proximal hydroxy 1-bearing stereocenter using metal chelation is required. To this end, conjugate reduction of enone 15 using Stryker's reagent {[Ph3PCuH]6}[14] and oxidative removal of both PMB groups with DDQ (2,3- dichloro-5,6-dicyano-l,4-benzoquinone) provides the intermediate β-hydroxy ketone, which undergoes 1,3-syn selective reduction when treated with a cold (—30 °C) ethereal solution of Zn(BH )2 [15] generating triol 16 (>20.T dr).[16] Finally, the synthesis of subunit 4' is completed by a 3-step sequence involving selective TBS protection of the Cu and C19 hydroxyl groups over that at C2! (TBSOTf), cleavage (TBAF, AcOH) of the primary TBS ether in 17 and oxidation of resulting alcohol 18 (TEMPO/PhI(OAc)2).[17]
V: Tandre s/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 Scheme 3 Synthesis of C4-C10 phosphonate 3'.
Figure imgf000050_0001
3'
As the primary objective in this example of synthetic method (1) is realizing an efficient and convergent synthesis of dictyostatin (If), it is crucial to install the (10Z)- olefin employing advanced coupling partners. While a number of protocols exist to effect such coupling, most require strongly basic conditions. There are obviously concerns regarding the epimerizable center at C12 in aldehyde 4', which led to the investigation of the mild Still-Gennari modification of the HWE olefination.1-1 ^ The requisite CF3CH2O-substituted phosphonate 3 was prepared, as detailed in Scheme 3, starting from alcohol 19, obtained in 95% ee and 20: 1 dr through a Brown asymmetric crotylation of aldehyde 20.[19] Silyl ether formation (TBSOTf), ozonolysis and Takai methylenation'20] of the intermediate aldehyde provides (E)-vinyl iodide 21 in 71% yield. After selective cleavage of the primary silyl ether, oxidation of the resulting alcohol affords acid 22 which is transformed into its acid chloride using the Ghosez reagent (Me2C=C(Cl)NMe2).t21] Next, (F3CCH2O)2P(O)CH2Li,[22:ι generated at -100 °C, is added to the acid chloride affording phosphonate 3 containing the required functionality for the pivotal fragment assembly (Scheme 4).
Vi/Tandrews/Cambridge Universiry/ PP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 Scheme 4 Synthesis of seco-acid 26.
3' 4"
Figure imgf000051_0001
R = TIPS
83%, 2 steps c 25: L— 26: R = H
When a mixture of aldehyde 4' and phosphonate 3' is subjected to an excess of K CO3 in the presence of 18-crown-6 in toluene,'18] the HWE coupling proceeds smoothly producing (Z)-enone 23 efficiently, with good levels of selectivity (Z:E = 5:1, 77%). Notably, this constitutes one of the first examples of a (Z)-selective intermolecular Still-Gennari olefination employing such an elaborate β-keto phosphonate. Construction of the dictyostatin carbon backbone is completed through a copper-mediated, Liebeskind-
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge Universiry/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 type Stille coupling, [23] using copper (I) thiophenecarboxylate (CuTC) in l-methyl-2- pyrrolidinone (NMP), between vinyl iodide 23 and (Z)-vinyl stannane 5, readily accessible from known acid 24.[24] Finally, conversion of TIPS ester 25 into acid 26 is achieved (KF, THF/MeOH) in 83% overall yield.
Scheme 5 Completion of the synthesis of dictyostatin (If).
26
77%
Figure imgf000052_0001
i— 27: R = TBS
87% (lf): Dicty°statin' R = H
With 26 in hand, completion of the synthesis is achieved via a macrolactonizaton reaction, as shown in Scheme 5 above. Seco-acid 26 is subjected to a standard Yamaguchi macrolactonization protocol (2,4,6-trichlorobenzoyl chloride, NEt3, DMAP, PhMe, 60 °C, 2 h) to furnish the 22-membered macrocycle 2 cleanly in 77% yield. [25] The reduction of the C9-ketone is achieved by exploiting macrocyclic stereocontrol.'8-1
V: Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 Luche reduction of enone 2 (NaBEU, CeCl3, EtOH)'26-1 provides the expected alcohol 27 (70%). Finally, global deprotection is achieved with 3N HCI in methanol to give dictyostatin (If) in 87% yield. The spectroscopic data of the synthetic material are in complete agreement with those of an authentic sample obtained from the Corallistidae sponge source (700 MHz 1H and 125 MHz 13C NMR, MS), while the specific rotation of [OC]D = -32.7 (c = 0.22, MeOH) agrees with that measured in our laboratory for the authentic sample, '27:ι thus allowing" confident assignment of the absolute configuration of dictyostatin as shown in (If).
This expedient total synthesis of (-)-dictyostatin unequivocally establishes the relative and absolute configuration as shown in (If).
Method (10) is highly flexible and allows functional group modifications at various points in the synthesis, allowing access to further dictyostatin derivatives and analogues. Examples include the following:
(27) A method according to any one of (10) to (26), wherein one or more of the double bonds in said compound of formula (If), (Ig), (Ih), (Ii) or (Ij) is reduced to give a single bond or bonds. Examples include those set out in Scheme 6 below:
V: Tandrews/Ca bridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 Scheme 6
Figure imgf000054_0001
2,3,4,5-tetrahydro dictyostatin 2,3,4,5,10,11-hexahydro dictyostatin
Figure imgf000054_0002
(28) A method according to any one of (10) to (27), wherein one or more of the hydroxyl groups in said compound of formula (If), (Ig), (Hi), (Ii) or (Ij) is oxidised to give one or more carbonyl groups. Examples include those illustrated in Scheme 7 below:
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 Scheme 7
Figure imgf000055_0001
dictyostatin (If) R-i = H; R2 = OH or R-, = R2 = O R4 = H; R3 = OH or R4 = R3 = O R6 = H; R5 = OH or R6 = R5 = O R7 = H; R8 = OH or R7 = R8 = O
Figure imgf000055_0002
dictyostatin (If)
(29) A method according to any one of (10) to (28), wherein one or more of the double bonds in said compound of formula (If), (Ig), (Ih), (Ii) or (Ij) is subjected to epoxidation or cyclopropanation to give a compound of formula (I) wherein one or more of R and Rb together and/or Rc and Rd together and/or Re and Rf together represents a group of formula -CH2- or a group of formula -O-. Examples include those illustrated in Scheme 8 below:
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 Scheme 8
Figure imgf000056_0001
(30) A method according to any one of (10) to (29), wherein one or more hydroxyl groups in said compound of formula (If), (Ig), (H ), (Ii) or (Ij) or in intermediates in said method are subjected to etherification or esterification to give a compound of formula (I) having one or more etherified or esterified groups. Examples include those illustrated in Scheme 9 below:
V:/Tandre s/Cambridge Universiry/ PP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 Scheme 9
Figure imgf000057_0001
Δ10,11-dihydro dictyostatin or
Figure imgf000057_0002
Figure imgf000057_0003
R = alkyl, benzyl, acyl R = alkyl, benzyl, acyl
Cg-ethers and esters of dictyostat n
V: Tandre s/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 Scheme 9 (Continued)
Figure imgf000058_0001
Figure imgf000058_0002
R = sil alkyl group coupling partner C coupling partner B s
Figure imgf000058_0003
( O
OR
R = silyl protecting group or alkyl group coupling partner A
V: Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 Scheme 9 (continued)
Using coupling partners A B and C and either protecting C19 alcohol after reduction or alkylating C19 alcohol after reduction and/or alkylating
C9 alcohol or not alkylating C9 alcohol after reduction - a total of 24 ethers of dictyostatin may be prepared selectively
= H, alkyl, benzyl, acyl etc
Figure imgf000059_0001
(31) A method according to (10), wherein the intermediate of formula (XI):
Figure imgf000059_0002
is subjected to a conjugate addition reaction with a compound of formula R^M1 wherein Ral is selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group, an aryl group and an aralkyl group as defined and exemplified above and M1 is selected from copper and magnesium to give an intermediate of formula (XII):
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04
Figure imgf000060_0001
the C-9 ketone of said intermediate of formula (XII) then being reduced to give a compound of formula (Ik) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000060_0002
(Ik) and, if desired, removing any protecting groups R3, R13 and P4 from said compound of formula (He) to give hydroxyl groups and/or converting one or more of said groups and the hydroxyl group at the C-9 position to other functional groups of formulae Rg, R1, RJ and Rh respectively to give further compounds of formula (I) or salts thereof. Examples include those illustrated in Scheme 10 below:
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge Uni versity/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 Scheme 10
Figure imgf000061_0001
advanced intermediate from total synthesis of dictyostatin (2 from Scheme 5)
1. NaBH4 2. HCI, MeOH
Figure imgf000061_0002
11 -substituted 10,11 -dihydro dictyostatin
(32) A method according to (10), wherein the intermediate of formula (XI):
V:/Tandre s/Cambridge Universiry/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04
Figure imgf000062_0001
is subjected to a 1,2 nucleophilic reaction with a compound of formula RqlM\ wherein Rql is selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group, an aryl group and an aralkyl group as defined and exemplified above and M1 is selected from lithium, sodium, magnesium and potassium, to give a compound of formula (II) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000062_0002
(ID
and, if desired, removing any protecting groups R3, R13 and P4 from said compound of formula (II) to give hydroxyl groups and/or converting one or more of said groups and the hydroxyl group at the C-9 position to other functional groups of formulae Rg, R1, R" and Rh respectively to give further compounds of formula (I) or salts thereof. Examples include those illustrated in Scheme 11 below:
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge Universit /WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 Scheme 11
Figure imgf000063_0001
advanced intermediate from total synthesis of dictyostatin (2 from Scheme 5)
Figure imgf000063_0002
HCI, MeOH
Figure imgf000063_0003
9-substituted dictyostatin
V: Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 (33) A method according to (10), wherein in step (b), instead of reducing the double bond of the enone of the intermediate of formula (VI) to a single bond it is subjected to a conjugate addition reaction with a compound of formula RplM2, wherein Rpl is selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group, an aryl group and an aralkyl group as defined and exemplified above and M2 is selected from copper and magnesium, before reducing the carbonyl group to a protected hydroxy group, to give an intermediate of formula (Vila):
Figure imgf000064_0001
said intermediate of formula (Vila) then being subjected to the remaining steps (c) to (h) of (10) to give a compound of formula (Im) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000064_0002
(Im)
Examples include those illustrated in Scheme 12 below:
V: Tandrews/CambridgeUniversity/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 Scheme 12
Figure imgf000065_0001
similar sequence of reactions to that used in the total synthesis of dictyostatin
Figure imgf000065_0002
Further examples of the method (1) include the following:
(34) A method according to (1) above comprising the following steps:
(a) subjecting an intermediate of formula (VIII) as defined in (10) above to a Stork- Wittig reaction to give the following intermediate of formula (XIII):
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04
Figure imgf000066_0001
wherein Hal is a halogen atom (preferably an iodine atom);
(b) coupling the compound of formula (XIII) with a compound of formula (IVg):
Figure imgf000066_0002
wherein Y is a halogen atom, a group of formula Sn(R )3 (wherein each R is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a group of formula Si(R20)3 (wherein each R20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a group of formula B(OR21)2 wherein each R21 is the same or different and is an alkyl group or an aryl group, a group of formula CHCHCO2R14 or a group of formula CCCO2R14 and R°, Rv, R13 and R14 are as defined in (1) above, to give a compound of formula (XIN):
Figure imgf000066_0003
V: Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 (c) where Y2 is a halogen atom, coupling said compound of formula (XIV) with a compound of formula (Va) as defined in (10):
Figure imgf000067_0001
(Va)
to give a compound of formula (XV):
Figure imgf000067_0002
(d) subjecting said compound of formula (XV) or said compound of formula (XIV) wherein Y2 is a group of formula CHCHCO2R14 or a group of formula CCCO2R14to a macrolactonisation reaction to give a compound of formula (Ig):
Figure imgf000067_0003
V: Tandrews/Cambridge Universiry/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 (e) and, if desired, removing any protecting groups R3, R13 and P4 from said compound of formula (Ig) to give hydroxyl groups and/or converting one or more of said groups and the hydroxyl group at the C-9 position to other functional groups of formulae Rg, R1, Rj and Rh respectively to give further compounds of formula (Hi) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000068_0001
(Ih) Examples of method (34) include those illustrated in Scheme 13 below:
Scheme 13
Figure imgf000068_0002
intermediate in dictyostatin synthesis (4 in Scheme 1)
C02R,
Figure imgf000068_0003
Figure imgf000068_0004
synthesis of dictyostatin
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/ PP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 (35) A method according to (1) above comprising the following steps:
(a) subjecting an intermediate of formula (VHI) as defined in (10) above to a reaction to convert the aldehyde group thereof to an alkynyl group to give the following intermediate of formula (XVI):
Figure imgf000069_0001
(b) converting said compound of formula (XVI) to the metallated alkynyl derivative thereof and reacting this with a compound of formula (IVb):
Figure imgf000069_0002
(IVb) wherein L1 is a leaving group (preferably a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a triflate, a mesylate or a tosylate), Y2 is a halogen atom, a group of formula Sn(R20)3 (wherein each
R20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a group of formula Si(R20)3 (wherein each R20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a group of formula B(OR21)2 wherein each R21 is the same or different and is an alkyl group or an aryl group, a group of formula CHCHCO2R14 or a group of formula CCCO2R14 and R°, Rv, R13 and R14 are as defined in (1) above, to give a compound of formula (XVII):
V:/Tandre s/Cambridge Universiry/WPP290192sl PCT description CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04
Figure imgf000070_0001
(c) hydrogenating the triple bond group to a double bond to give a compound of formula (XVIII):
Figure imgf000070_0002
(d) where Y2 is a halogen atom, coupling said compound of formula (XVIII) with a compound of formula (Va) as defined in (10) above:
Figure imgf000070_0003
(Va)
to give a compound of formula (X) as defined in (10) above;
V: Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 (e) subjecting said compound of formula (X) or said compound of formula (XVIII) wherein Y2 is a group of formula CHCHCO2R14 or a group of formula CCCO2R14to a macrolactonisation reaction to give a compound of formula (XI) as defined in (10) above;
(f) subjecting said compound of formula (XI) to step (g) as defined in (10) above to give a compound of formula (Ig) or a salt thereof as defined in (10) above and, if desired, removing any protecting groups R3, R13 and P4 from said compound of formula (Ig) to give hydroxyl groups and/or converting one or more of said groups and the hydroxyl group at the C-9 position to other functional groups of formulae Rε, R1, Rj and Rh respectively to give a compound of formula (H ) or a salt thereof as defined in (10) above. Examples of method (35) include those illustrated in Scheme 14 below:
V: randrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 Scheme 14
Figure imgf000072_0001
intermediate in dictyostatin synthesis 1. RM (R = H, alkyl, aryl, M = Na, Li, (4 in Scheme 1 above) K, Mg) also transmetallation may provide M = Ce, Cu, etc.
Figure imgf000072_0003
L = halogen or alkoxy
Figure imgf000072_0002
" Y2 = halogen, CHCHC02R14,
CCC02R 14
Figure imgf000072_0004
(36) A method according to (1) above, comprising the following steps:
(a) reacting a compound of formula (IX) as defined in (10) above:
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04
Figure imgf000073_0001
(IX) with a compound of formula (Va) as defined in (10) above:
Figure imgf000073_0002
(Va) under Yamaguchi esterification conditions to give a compound of formula (XIX):
Figure imgf000073_0003
(XIX) (b) subjecting said compound of formula (XIX) to a coupling reaction (preferably a Stille coupling or a coupling using copper I thiophenecarboxylate) to give a compound of formula (XI) as defined in (10) above; and
(c) subjecting said compound of formula (XI) to step (g) of (10) above to give a compound of formula (Ig) or a salt thereof and, if desired, subjecting said compound of formula (Ig) to step (h) of (10) above to give a compound of formula (Hi) or a salt thereof.
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192sl PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 Examples of method (36) include those illustrated in Scheme 15 below:
Scheme 15
Figure imgf000074_0001
(37) A method according to (1) above comprismg the following steps:
(a) reacting a compound of formula (VII) as defined in (10) above with a compound of formula (Vb) under Yamaguchi esterification conditions:
Figure imgf000074_0002
(Vb)
17 1 S 1 wherein R and R are as defined in (1) above and Z is a halogen atom or a group of formula Sn(R20)3 wherein R20 is as defined in (1) above,
VTTandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 to give a compound of formula (XX):
Figure imgf000075_0001
(XX)
(b) selectively removing the protecting group P2 and oxidising the resulting hydroxy group to give a compound of formula (XXI):
Figure imgf000075_0002
(XXI)
(c) coupling said compound of formula (XXI) with a compound of formula (IVb):
Figure imgf000075_0003
(IVb)
wherein
Figure imgf000075_0004
is as defined in (1) above, to give a compound of formula (XXII):
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge Universit /WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04
Figure imgf000076_0001
(XXII)
(d) subjecting said compound of formula (XXII) to a coupling reaction (preferably a Stille coupling or a coupling using copper I thiophenecarboxylate) to give a compound of formula (XI) as defined in (10) above; and
(e) subjecting said compound of formula (XI) to step (g) of (10) above to give a compound of formula (Ig) or a salt thereof and, if desired, subjecting said compound of formula (Ig) to step (g) of (10) above to give a compound of formula (Hi) or a salt thereof.
Examples of method (37) include those illustrated in Scheme 16 below:
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/ PP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 16
Scheme 16
Figure imgf000077_0001
Yamaguchi esterification
Figure imgf000077_0002
Figure imgf000077_0003
intermediate in dictyostatin synthesis (17 in Scheme 2) I; . selective deprotection 2. oxidation
Figure imgf000077_0004
Stille coupling or CuTC coupling
Figure imgf000077_0005
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 (38) A method according to (1) above, comprising the following steps:
(a) deprotecting the OP2 group of a compound of formula (VII) as defined in (10) above, and converting the resulting hydroxyl group to give a compound of formula (XXIII) wherein said group Q is a group of formula P(R19b)3 +I", wherein each R19b is the same or different and is an aryl group as defined and exemplified above, or to a group of formula P(O)(OR19c)2 wherein each R19c is the same or different and is an alkyl group, a haloalkyl group or an aryl group as defined and exemplified above:
Figure imgf000078_0001
(b) coupling said compound of formula (XXIII) with a compound of formula (IVc) under Wittig conditions:
Figure imgf000078_0002
(IVc)
wherein P5 is a hydrogen atom or a hydroxy protecting group as defined and exemplified above, Hal is a halogen atom and R°, Rv and R13 are as defined in (1) above, to give a compound of formula (XXIV):
V: Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04
Figure imgf000079_0001
(XXIV)
(c) subjecting said compound of formula (XXIV) to steps (e) and (f) as defined in (10) above to give a compound of formula (Ig) or a salt thereof and, if desired, subjecting said compound of formula (Ig) to step (h) as defined in (10) above to give a compound of formula (Hi).
Examples of method (38) include those illustrated in Scheme 17 below:
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge Universiry/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 Scheme 17
Figure imgf000080_0001
intermediate in dictyostatin synthesis (18 in Scheme 2)
coupling fragment 1
Figure imgf000080_0002
1. alcohol protection
2. selective
Figure imgf000080_0003
1. deprotect
2. oxidation
Figure imgf000080_0005
Figure imgf000080_0004
coupling fragment 2
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 Scheme 17 (continued)
Figure imgf000081_0001
similar sequence
Figure imgf000081_0002
(39) A method according to (1) above, comprising the following steps:
(a) reacting compounds of formulae (lib) and (Illb):
Figure imgf000081_0003
wherein L1 is a leaving group (preferably a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a triflate, a mesylate or a tosylate) and all other groups are as defined in (1) above to give a compound of formula (XXV):
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04
Figure imgf000082_0001
(b) reducing the ketone group of said compound of formula (XXV) to a hydroxy group and protecting said group to give a compound of formula (Nil) as defined in (10) above;
(c) subjecting said compound of formula (VII) to steps (c), (d), (e), (f), (g) and optionally (h) as defined in (10) above to give a compound of formula (Ig) or (Hi) or salts thereof.
Examples of method (39) include those illustrated in Scheme 18 below:
Scheme 18
Diastereoselective reduction 02Et
Figure imgf000082_0002
Reduction
FGI
Figure imgf000082_0004
Figure imgf000082_0003
Lz = Br, I, OTf, OMs, OTs
Alkylation
Figure imgf000082_0005
intermediate in Dictyostatin synthesis
Figure imgf000082_0006
(15 in Scheme 2) n erme a e n
Dictyostatin synthesis in Scheme 2) d Uictyostatin
V:/Tandre s/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 (40) A method according to (1) above comprising the following steps:
(a) reacting compounds of formulae (lie) and (IIIc):
Figure imgf000083_0001
wherein L2 is a leaving group (preferably a halogen atom, a triflate, a mesylate or a tosylate) and all other groups are as defined in (1) above in a dithiane alkylation and then removing the dithiane group to give a compound of formula (XXV) as defined in (39) above;
(b) reducing the ketone group of said compound of formula (XXV) to a hydroxy group and protecting said group to give a compound of formula (Nil) as defined in (10) above;
(c) subjecting said compound of formula (Nil) to steps (c), (d), (e), (f), (g) and optionally (h) as defined in (10) above to give a compound of formula (Ig) or (Ih) or salts thereof.
Examples of method (40) include those illustrated in Scheme 19 below:
V: Tandrews/Cambridge University/ PP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 Scheme 19
Figure imgf000084_0001
intermediate in Dictyostatin synthesis (15 in Scheme 2)
(41) A method according to (1) above, comprising the following steps:
(a) reacting compounds of formulae (lid) and (Hid):
Figure imgf000084_0002
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 wherein M2 is a selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom, Si(R')3 (wherein R' is as defined in (1) above), Sn(R')3 (wherein R is as defined is as defined in (1) above) and B(OR')2 (wherein R' is as defined is as defined in (1) above), Q2 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom or an alkoxy group as defined and exemplified above, and all other substituents are as defined in (1) above, to give a compound of formula (VI) as defined in (10) above;
(c) subjecting said compound of formula (VI) to steps (b), (c), (d), (e), (f), (g) and optionally (h) as defined in (10) above to give a compound of formula (Ig) or (Hi) or salts thereof.
Examples of method (41) include those illustrated in Scheme 20 below:
Scheme 20
Figure imgf000085_0001
Dictyostatin
Figure imgf000085_0002
Advance intermediate in Dictyostatin synthesis (15 in Scheme 2)
(42) A method according to (1) above, comprising the following steps:
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 (a) coupling compounds of formulae (TNd) and (Vc): - -- -
Figure imgf000086_0001
to give a compound of formula (XXVI):
Figure imgf000086_0002
(XXVI)
(b) removing the protecting group R13 from said compound of formula (XXVI) and oxidising the resulting hydroxyl group to give a formyl group, optionally hydrogenating the triple bond of said compound before doing so, to give a compound of formula (XXVIIa) or (XXVIIb):
Figure imgf000086_0003
(XXVπa)
Figure imgf000086_0004
(c) reacting said compound of formula (XXVIIa) or (XXVIIb) with a compound of formula (He):
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04
Figure imgf000087_0001
wherein Alk is an alkyl group as defined and exemplified above and all other groups are as defined in (1) above, to give a compound of formula (XXNIIIa) or (XXNIIIb):
Figure imgf000087_0002
(XXVffla) (xxvmb)
(d) for said compound of formula (XXNIIIa), hydrogenating the triple bond thereof to give a compound of formula (XXNIIIb);
(e) reducing the CO2Alk group of said compound of formula (XXNIIIb) to an aldehyde group and the C-9 carbonyl group to a hydroxy group to give a compound of formula (XXIX):
V:Tandrews/Cambridge Universit /WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04
Figure imgf000088_0001
(xxrx)
(f) reacting said compound of formula (XXLX) with a compound of formula (Ilia) as defined in (10) above, to give a compound of formula (XXX):
Figure imgf000088_0002
(XXX)
(g) selectively reducing the double bond of the enone of said compound of formula (XXX) to a single bond, converting the carbonyl group of said enone to a protected hydroxyl group and oxidizing the C-9 hydroxy group to a carbonyl group to give a compound of formula (X) as defined in (10) above;
(h) subjecting said compound of formula (X) to the reactions of steps (f) and (g) of (10) above to give a compound of formula (Ig) or a salt thereof and, if desired, further subjecting said compound of formula (Ig) to the reactions of step (h) of (10) above to give a compound of formula (Hi).
Examples of method (42) include those illustrated in Scheme 21 below:
V: Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 Scheme 21
Me
Coupling with r_r R
PMBO. J. Reduction = Me — — — 7" PMB0^^^^ methylenation I R = Cθ2R14 *"
Figure imgf000089_0001
Ester Reduction
Similar sequence of transformations to that reported in the total synthesis (10) of Dictyostatin above
Dictyostatin
(43) A method according to (1) above, comprising the following steps:
(a) converting the aldehyde group in a compound of formula (VTII) as defined in (10) above to an ethynyl group to give a compound of formula (XXXI):
V: Tandrews/Cambridge Universit WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04
Figure imgf000090_0001
(XXXI)
(b) converting said compound of formula (XXXI) to the metallated alkynyl derivative thereof and reacting this with a compound of formula (IVe):
Figure imgf000090_0002
(IVe) wherein Y is a halogen atom, a group of formula CHCHCO2R or a group of formula CCCO2R14 and R°, Rv, R13 and R14 are as defined in (1) above, and Hal is a halogen atom, to give a compound of formula (XXXII):
Figure imgf000090_0003
(c) hydrogenating the triple bond group to a double bond to give a compound of formula (XXXIII):
V: Tandrews/Cambridge Universiry/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04
Figure imgf000091_0001
(XXXIII)
(d) where Y is a halogen atom, coupling said compound of formula (XXXIII) with a compound of formula (Va) as defined in (10) above:
Figure imgf000091_0002
(Va)
to give a compound of formula (X) as defined in (10) above;
(e) subjecting said compound of formula (X) or said compound of formula (XXXIII) wherein Y2 is a group of formula CHCHCO2R14 or a group of formula CCCO2R14to a macrolactonisation reaction to give a compound of formula (XI) as defined in (10) above;
(f) subjecting said compound of formula (XI) to the reaction of step (g) of (10) above to give a compound of formula (Ig) or a salt thereof and, if desired, further subjecting said compound of formula (Ig) to the reactions of step (h) of (10) above to give a compound of formula (Ih).
Examples of method (43) include those illustrated in Scheme 22 below:
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 Scheme 22
Figure imgf000092_0001
Advance intermediate in the Dictyostatin synthesis (4 in Scheme 2)
Figure imgf000092_0002
Figure imgf000092_0003
(44) A method according to (1) above, comprising the following steps:
(a) reacting a compound of formula (Ilf):
V. Tandrews/Cambridge Universit /WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12 04
Figure imgf000093_0001
wherein Rk, Rr, Rs, R , Rx, R3 and P1 are as defined in (1) above, with a compound of formula (IVa) as defined in (10) above, to give a compound of formula (XXXIV):
Figure imgf000093_0002
(XXXIV) (b) reducing the C-7 carbonyl of said compound of formula (XXXIV) and protecting the resulting hydroxy group to give a compound of formula (XXXV):
Figure imgf000093_0003
wherein R13 is a hydroxy protecting group;
(c) converting the group OP1 in said compound of formula (XXXV) to an aldehyde group to give a compound of formula (XXXVI):
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04
Figure imgf000094_0001
(XXXVI)
(d) reacting said compound of formula (XXXVI) with a compound of formula (Ilia) as defined in (10) above to give a compound of formula (XXXNII):
Figure imgf000094_0002
(XXXVII)
(e) converting the double bond of the enone of said compound of formula (XXXNII) to a single bond and reducing the carbonyl group thereof to a protected hydroxyl group of formula -OP4 ,wherein P4 is as defined and exemplified above, to give a group of formula (XXXNIII):
V: Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04
Figure imgf000095_0001
(XXXVIII)
(f) coupling said compound of formula (XXXVIII) with a compound of formula (Va) as defined in (10) to give a compound of formula (XV) as defined in (34) above;
(g) subjecting said compound of formula (XV) to a macrolactonisation reaction to give a compound of formula (Ig) or a salt thereof as defined in (10) above;
(h) and, if desired, removing any protecting groups R3, R13 and P4 from said compound of formula (Ig) to give hydroxyl groups and/or converting one or more of said groups and the hydroxyl group at the C-9 position to other functional groups of formulae Rg, R1, RJ and Rh respectively to give a compound of formula (H ) or a salt thereof as defined in (10) above.
Examples of method (44) include those illustrated in Scheme 23 below:
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 Scheme 23
1. LiAIH4
2. protection of primary alcohol
Figure imgf000096_0001
Figure imgf000096_0002
X = chiral auxiliary intermediate in total synthesis of dictyostatin (11 in
Scheme 2)
Still-Gennari coupling with
C3-Cιo phosphonate
Figure imgf000096_0003
Figure imgf000096_0004
Figure imgf000096_0005
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 Scheme 23 (continued)
Figure imgf000097_0001
1. C21-deprotection protection of 2. 1,3-syn reduction C19 alcohol
Figure imgf000097_0002
Figure imgf000097_0003
macrolactonisation
Figure imgf000097_0004
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 In addition to the method (1) and variations thereon above, the present also provides further methods for the synthesis of disctyostatin analogues as defined below:
(45) A method for the synthesis of a dictyostatin analogue of formula (XXXIX) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000098_0001
(XXXIX)
wherein R22 is selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a group of formula -NR'R" (wherein R' and R" are the same or different and each is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), an alkoxy group and a haloalkoxy group as defined and exemplified above and the other groups are as defined in (1) above, said method comprising the following steps:
(a) reducing the double bond of the enone of a compound of formula (XXXVII) as defined in (44) above to a single bond to give a compound of formula (XL):
Figure imgf000098_0002
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 (b) subjecting said compound of formula (XL) to a vinyl halide coupling reaction to give a compound of formula (XLI):
Figure imgf000099_0001
(c) converting the carbonyl group of said compound of formula (XLI) to a group of formula -OR' and said groups R3 and R13 to groups of formulae Rg and R1 respectively to give a dictyostatin analogue of formula (XXXIX) or a salt thereof.
Examples of method (45) include those illustrated in Scheme 24 below:
Scheme 24
Figure imgf000099_0002
Figure imgf000099_0003
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 (46) A method for the synthesis of a dictyostatin analogue of formula (XLII) or a salt thereof: - - - — - — —
Figure imgf000100_0001
(XLII)
wherein R is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy protecting group, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group, an aryl group and an acyl group as defined and exemplified above and the other groups are as defined in (1) above, said method comprising the following steps:
(a) deprotecting the C-19 alcohol in the compound of formula (X) as defined in (10) above to give a compound of formula (XLIII):
Figure imgf000100_0002
(XLIII)
(b) subjecting said compound of formula (XLIII) to a macrolactonisation reaction to give a compound of formula (XLIV):
V /Tandrews/Cambπdge Umversιty/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29 1204
(XLIV)
(c) reducing the ketone group at the C-9 position to a hydroxyl group to give a compound of formula (XLN) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000101_0002
(XLIV)
(d) and, where needed, removing any protecting groups R , R and R from said compound of formula (XLIN) to give hydroxyl groups and/or converting one or more of said groups and the hydroxyl group at the C-9 position to other functional groups of formulae Rg, R1, R23 and Rh respectively to give a compound of formula (XLIII) or a salt thereof.
Examples of method (46) include those illustrated in Scheme 25 below:
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge Universiry/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 Scheme 25
Figure imgf000102_0001
advanced intermediate in total synthesis of dictyostatin (26 in Scherrie 4)
Figure imgf000102_0002
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge Universit /WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 (47) A method for the synthesis of a dictyostatin analogue of formula (XL V) or a salt thereof: - - - - -
Figure imgf000103_0001
wherein Rg, Rh, Rj, Rj, Rk, Rn, Rr, Rs, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz are as defined in (1) above, said method comprising the following steps:
(a) performing a palladium catalysed cabonylation reaction on a compound of formula (IX) as defined in (10) above to give a compound of formula (XL VI):
Figure imgf000103_0002
wherein R\ R R1J, P4, Rκ, Rn, Rr, Rs, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz are as defined in (10) above;
(b) subjecting said compound of formula (XL VI) to a macrolactonisation reaction to give a compound of formula (XL VII):
V: Tandrews/Cambridge Universit /WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04
Figure imgf000104_0001
(XLVII)
(c) reducing the ketone group at the C-7 position to a hydroxyl group to give a compound of formula (XL VIII) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000104_0002
(h) and, where needed, removing any protecting groups R3, R13 and P4 from said compound of formula (XL VIII) to give hydroxyl groups and/or converting one or more of said groups and the hydroxyl group at the C-7 position to other functional groups of formulae Rg, R1, R* and Rh respectively to give a compound of formula (XLV) or a salt thereof.
Examples of method (47) include those illustrated in Scheme 26 below:
V./Tandre s/Cambridge Universiry/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 Scheme 26
Figure imgf000105_0001
advanced intermediate in total synthesis of dictyostatin
(23 in Scheme 4)
Figure imgf000105_0002
(48) A method for the synthesis of a dictyostatin analogue of formula (In) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000105_0003
(In)
wherein Rg, Rh, Rj, Rj, Rk, Rn, Rr, Rs, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz are as defined in (1) above, said method comprising the following steps:
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/ PP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 (a) performing a Sonagashira coupling reaction on a compound of formula (IX) as defined in (10) to give a compound of formula (IL):
Figure imgf000106_0001
wherein R3, Ry, R13, P4, Rk, Rn, Rr, Rs, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz are as defined in (10) above;
(b) subjecting said compound of formula (IL) to a macrolactonisation reaction to give a compound of formula (L):
Figure imgf000106_0002
(c) reducing the ketone group at the C-9 position to a hydroxyl group to give a compound of formula (LI) or a salt thereof:
V:/Tandre s/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04
Figure imgf000107_0001
(d) and, where needed, removing any protecting groups R3, R13 and P4 from said compound of formula (LI) to give hydroxyl groups and/or converting one or more of said groups and the hydroxyl group at the C-9 position to other functional groups of formulae Rg, Rl, RJ and Rh respectively to give a compound of formula (In) or a salt thereof. Examples of method (48) include those illustrated in Scheme 27 below:
Scheme 27
Figure imgf000107_0002
V:/Tandre s/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 (49) A method for the synthesis of a dictyostatin analogue of formula (LIT) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000108_0001
(Lll)
wherein Rg, Rh, R Rj, Rk, Rn, Rr, Rs, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz are as defined in (1) above and n3 is an integer of from 1 to 4, said method comprising the following steps:
(a) performing a palladium catalysed coupling reaction (preferably Suzuki or Negishi) on a compound of formula (IX) as defmed in (10) above with a compound of formula M -(CH2)n3-CH OP , wherein M is selected from the group consisting of B(OR')2 (wherein R' is as defined is as defined in (1) above) and ZnR' (wherein R' is as defined is as defined in (1) above), P6 is a hydroxy protecting group and n3 is as defined above, followed by deprotection of the CH OP6 group and oxidation of the resulting primary hydroxy group to a carboxy group to give a compound of formula (LIU):
Figure imgf000108_0002
(Llll)
wherein R3, R9, R13, P4, Rk, Rn, Rr, Rs, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz are as defined in (10) above;
V:/Tandrews/CambridgeUniversiry/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 (b) subjecting said compound of formula (LIII) to a macrolactonisation reaction to give a compound of formula (LI V):
Figure imgf000109_0001
(c) reducing the ketone group at the C-9 position to a hydroxyl group to give a compound of formula (LV):
Figure imgf000109_0002
(d) and, where needed, removing any protecting groups R3, R13 and P4 from said compound of formula (LV) to give hydroxyl groups and/or converting one or more of said groups and the hydroxyl group at the C-9 position to other functional groups of formulae Rε, R1, RJ and Rh respectively to give a compound of formula (LII) or a salt thereof.
Examples of method (49) include those illustrated in Scheme 28 below:
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 Scheme 28
Figure imgf000110_0001
advanced intermediate in total synthesis of dictyostatin
(23 in Scheme 4)
Figure imgf000110_0002
The flexible methods of the present invention allow the synthesis of many novel dictyostatins and derivatives, analogues and salts thereof, which also form apart of the present invention.
(50) A compound having the following formula (Io) or a salt thereof:
V:Tandrews/Cambridge University WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04
Figure imgf000111_0001
(Io) wherein: each of Ra, Rb, Rc, Rd, Re and Rf is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
Ra and Rb together and/or R° and Rd together and/or Re and Rf together represent a single bond, a group of formula -CH2- or a group of formula -O-; each of Rs, Rh, R1 and R3 is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy protecting group, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group, an aryl group and an acyl group;
Rk is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group and an aralkyl group;
Rp and Rm are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
Rp and Rm together represent a single bond or a group of formula -CH2- or -O-;
Rn is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (said alkyl group being optionally substituted with at least one substituent selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom, an aryl group, an acyl group and an alkoxy group), an
V: Tandre s/Cambridge Universit WPP2901 2s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 alkenyl group (said alkenyl group being optionally substituted with at least one substituent selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom, an aryl group, an acyl group and an alkoxy group), an alkynyl group, a dienyl group and an aryl group;
R° is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group and an aralkyl group;
Rq is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group,
Rr and Rs are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a hydroxy group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
Rr and Rs together represent a single bond or a group of formula -CH2- or -O-;
R4and Ru are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
R* and Ru together represent a single bond or a group of formula -CH2- or -O-, or R* and
Ru together with the 2 carbon atoms to which they are connected form an aryl group; each of Rv, R , Rx Ry and Rz is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a group of formula -NR'R"
(wherein R' and R" are the same or different and each is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), an alkoxy group and a haloalkoxy group; and
X represents a group of formula -O-, a group of formula -CH2- or a group of formula -
NR', wherein R' is as defined above.
V: Tandre s/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 (51) A compound according to (50), wherein said compound of formula (Io) is a compound of formula (Ip) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000113_0001
(Ip)
(52) A compound according to (50), wherein said compound of formula (Io) is a compound of formula (Iq) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000113_0002
(Iq) (53) A compound according to (50), wherein said compound of formula (Io) is a compound of formula (Ir) or a salt thereof:
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge Universiry WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04
Figure imgf000114_0001
(Ir)
(54) A compound according to any one of (50) to (53) or a salt thereof, wherein each of R°, Rr and Rs is the same or different and is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
(55) A compound according to any one of (50) to (53) or a salt thereof, wherein each of R°, Rr and Rs is a hydrogen atom.
(56) A compound according to any one of (50) to (55) or a salt thereof, wherein each of Rk, Rv, R , Rx, Ry and Rz is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group and an aralkyl group.
(57) A compound according to (56) or a salt thereof, wherein each of Rk, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz is the same or different and is an alkyl group.
(58) A compound according to (56) or a salt thereof, wherein each of R , Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz is a methyl group.
(59) A compound according to any one of (50) to (58) or a salt thereof, wherein each of Rg, Rh, R1 and RJ is the same or different and is selected the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group, an aryl group, an alkylcarbonyl group, a haloalkylcarbonyl group, an arylcarbonyl group and a trialkylsilyl group.
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 (60) A compound according to (59) or a salt thereof, wherein each of Rg, Rh, R1 and RJ is a hydrogen atom.
(61) A compound according to any one of (50) to (60) or a salt thereof, wherein each of R* and Ru is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group or an aryl group.
(62) A compound according to (61) or a salt thereof, wherein each of R* and Ru is a hydrogen atom.
(63) A compound according to any one of (50) to (62) or a salt thereof, wherein Rn is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (said alkyl group being optionally substituted with at least one substituent selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom and an aryl group), an alkenyl group (said alkenyl group being optionally substituted with at least one substituent selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom and an aryl group), a dienyl group and an aryl group.
(64) A compound according to (63) or a salt thereof, wherein Rn is a dienyl group.
(65) A compound according to (63) or a salt thereof, wherein Rn is a 1,3-butadienyl group.
(66) A compound according to (50) or a salt thereof having the following formula (Is):
Figure imgf000115_0001
(Is)
V: Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 (67) A compound according to (50) or a salt thereof having the following formula (It):
Figure imgf000116_0001
(It)
(68) A dictyostatin analogue of formula (XXXIX) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000116_0002
(XXXIX)
wherein R22 is selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a group of formula -NR'R" (wherein R1 and R" are the same or different and each is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), an alkoxy group and a haloalkoxy group as defined and exemplified above and R9, Rs, Rh, R1, Rj, Rk, Rn, Rr, Rs, Rv, R , Rx, Ry and Rz are as defined in (1) above.
(69) A dictyostatin analogue of formula (XLII) or a salt thereof:
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04
Figure imgf000117_0001
(XLII)
wherein R is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy protecting group, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group, an aryl group and an acyl group as defined and exemplified above and R17, R18, Rg, Rh, Rf, Rk, Rn, Rr, Rs, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz are as defined in (1) above.
(70) A dictyostatin analogue of formula (XLV) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000117_0002
wherein Rg, Rh, R Rj, Rk, Rn, Rr, R\ Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz are as defined in (1) above.
(71) A dictyostatin analogue of formula (In) or a salt thereof:
V: Tandre s/Cambridge Uniyersity/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04
Figure imgf000118_0001
(In)
wherein Rg, Rh, Rj, Rj, Rk, Rn, Rr, Rs, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz are as defined in (1) above.
(72) A dictyostatin analogue of formula (LII) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000118_0002
(LII)
wherein Rg, Rh, R1, Rj, R , Rn, Rr, Rs, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz are as defined in (1) above and n3 is an integer of from 1 to 4. -
In compounds (50) to (72) above, substituents Ra, Rb, Rc, Rd, Re, Rf, Rg, Rh, R Rj, Rk, Rp, Rm, Rn, R°, Rq, Rr, Rs, R Ru, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry, Rz, R17, R18, R22, R23 and X are as defined and exemplified in the definitions and examples of the methods of the invention above.
The present invention also provides a number of intermediate compounds that are particularly suitable for the synthesis of dictyostatins and derivatives, analogues and derivatives thereof, said intermediates being as follows:
V:/Tandrews/CambridgeUniversiry/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 (73) A compound of formula (II):
Figure imgf000119_0001
(II)
wherein R .11, τ R.2z, r R>3J, τ R>44, τ R>5s, π R 1°5, τ R 1160, τ R>kκ, r R>rr, τ
Figure imgf000119_0002
R>ww a „_nd j τ R>xxare as defined in (1) above.
(74) A compound according to (73) of formula (Ilg):
Figure imgf000119_0003
(Ilg)
(75) A compound according to (73) of formula (Ila):
Figure imgf000119_0004
wherein P2 is a hydroxy protecting group and R3, Rk, Rr, Rs, Rw and Rx are as defined in (1) above.
(76) A compound according to (75) of formula (Ila'):
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04
Figure imgf000120_0001
(77) A compound according to (73) of formula (lib):
Figure imgf000120_0002
wherein L1 is a leaving group (preferably a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a triflate
9 l ggrroouupp,, aa mmeessyyllaattee ggrroouupp oorr aa ttoossyyllaattee ggrroouupp)),, P. ' is a hydroxy protecting group and R , R , Rr, Rs, Rw and Rx are as defined in (1) above.
(78) A compound according to (77) of formula (lib'):
Figure imgf000120_0003
(79) A compound according to (73) of formula (lie):
V:/Tandrews/Cambπdge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04
Figure imgf000121_0001
wherein L is a leaving group (preferably a halogen atom, a triflate group, a mesylate group or a tosylate group), P2 is a hydroxy protecting group and R3, Rk, Rr, Rs, Rw and Rx are as defined in (1) above.
(80) A compound according to (79) of formula (lie'):
Figure imgf000121_0002
(lie')
(81) A compound according to (73) of formula (lid):
Figure imgf000121_0003
wherein M2 is a selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom, Si(R')3 (wherein R is as defined in (1) above), Sn(R')3 (wherein R' is as defined is as defined in (1) above) and B(OR')3 (wherein R' is as defined is as defined in (1) above), P2 is a hydroxy protecting group and R3, Rk, Rr, Rs, Rw and Rx are as defined in (1) above.
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 (82) A compound according to (81 ) of formula (lid') :
Figure imgf000122_0001
(πd 1)
(83) A compound according to (73) of formula (He):
Figure imgf000122_0002
wherein Alk is an alkyl group as defined and exemplified above and R3, Rk, Rr, Rs, Rw and Rx are as defined in (1) above.
(84) A compound according to (83) of formula (lie'):
Figure imgf000122_0003
(85) A compound according to (73) of formula (Ilf):
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge Universiry/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04
Figure imgf000123_0001
wherein P1, R3, Rk, Rr, Rs, R and Rx are as defined in (1) above.
(86) A compound according to (85) of formula (Ilf):
Figure imgf000123_0002
(87) A compound of formula (III):
Figure imgf000123_0003
(in) wherein R°, R', Rs, Ry, Rn, Ry and R2 are as defined in (1) above.
(88) A compound according to (87) of formula (Ille):
V:/randrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04
Figure imgf000124_0001
(IHe)
(89) A compound according to (87) of formula (Ilia):
Figure imgf000124_0002
wherein R9, Rn, Ry and Rz are as defined in (1) above and each of said groups of formula R19a is the same or different and represents an alkoxy group or a haloalkoxy group as defined and exemplified above.
(90) A compound according to (89) of formula (Ilia'):
Figure imgf000124_0003
(ma')
(91) A compound according to (87) of formula (Illb):
Figure imgf000124_0004
(DTb)
V: Tandrews/Cambridge Universiry/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 wherein R9, Rn, Ry and Rz are as defined in (1) above. (92) A compound according to (91 ) of formula (Illb') :
Figure imgf000125_0001
(93) A compound according to (87) of formula (IIIc):
Figure imgf000125_0002
wherein R9, Rn, Ry and Rz are as defined in (1) above.
(94) A compound according to (93) above of formula (IIIc'):
Figure imgf000125_0003
One')
(95) A compound according to (87) of formula (Hid):
V:/Tandrews/CambridgeUniversity/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04
Figure imgf000126_0001
(Hid)
wherein R9, Rn, Ry and Rz are as defined in (1) above and Q2 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom or an alkoxy group as defined and exemplified above.
(96) A compound according to (95) of formula (Hid'):
Figure imgf000126_0002
(Hid')
(97) A compound of formula (IV):
Figure imgf000126_0003
wherein R , 10 , R> π, R τ> 12 , R T5 l3 , - Rno°, τ Rvv, Y and n are as defined in (1) above.
(98) A compound according to (97) of formula (IVf):
Figure imgf000126_0004
(99) A compound according to (97) of formula (IVa):
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04
Figure imgf000127_0001
(TVa) wherein R13, R19,R° and Rv are as defined in (1) above and Y1 is a halogen atom, a group of formula Sn(R20)3 (wherein each R20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a group of formula Si(R20)3 (wherein each R20 is the same or different and is an alkyl
91 1 group), or a group of formula B(OR )2 wherein each R is the same or different and is an alkyl group or an aryl group.
(100) A compound according to (99) of formula (IVa'):
Figure imgf000127_0002
(TVa1)
(101) A compound according to (97) of formula (IVb) :
R° Rv
L O OR^13^γ2 (IVb) wherein L1 is a leaving group (preferably a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a triflate, a
9 9Λ mesylate or a tosylate), Y is a halogen atom, a group of formula Sn(R )3 (wherein each R20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a group of formula Si(R20)3 (wherein each R20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a group of formula B(OR21)2 wherein each R21 is the same or different and is an alkyl group or an aryl group, a group of formula CHCHCO2R14 or a group of formula CCCO2R14 and R°, Rv, R13 and R14 are as defined in (1) above,
V: randrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 ( 102) A compound according to ( 101 ) above of formula (IVb') :
Figure imgf000128_0001
(IVb')
(103) A compound according to (97) of formula (INc):
Figure imgf000128_0002
(TVc) wherein R13, R° and Rv are as defined in (1) above, Hal is a halogen atom and P5 is a hydrogen atom or a hydroxy protecting group as defined and exemplified above.
(104) A compound according to (103) of formula (INc'):
Figure imgf000128_0003
(INc1)
(105) A compound according to (97) of formula (IVd):
Figure imgf000128_0004
(IVd) wherein R13 and Rv are as defined in (1) above and Hal is a halogen atom.
(106) A compound according to (105) of formula (IVd') :
V:/Tandre s/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04
Figure imgf000129_0001
(IVd')
(107) A compound according to (97) of formula (IVe) :
Figure imgf000129_0002
(IVe) wherein R13, R° and Rv are as defined in (1) above, Hal is a halogen atom and Y2 is a
90 9fl halogen atom, a group of formula Sn(R )3 (wherein each R is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a group of formula Si(R20)3 (wherein each R20 is the same or different
91 91 and is an alkyl group), a group of formula B(OR )2 wherein each R is the same or different and is an alkyl group or an aryl group, a group of formula CHCHCO2R14 or a group of formula CCCO2R14, wherein R14 is as defined in (1) above.
(108) A compound according to ( 107) of formula (IVe') :
Figure imgf000129_0003
(IVe')
(109) A compound according to (97) of formula (IVg):
Figure imgf000129_0004
(IVg)
V:Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 wherein Y2 is a halogen atom, a group of formula Sn(R20)3 (wherein each R20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a group of formula Si(R20)3 (wherein each R20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a group of formula B(OR21)2 wherein each R21 is the same or different and is an alkyl group or an aryl group, a group of formula CHCHCO2R14 or a group of formula CCCO2R14 and R°, Rv, R13 and R14 are as defined in (1) above
(110) A compound according to ( 109) of formula (IVg') :
Figure imgf000130_0001
(IVg')
(111) A compound of formula (V) :
Figure imgf000130_0002
(V) wherein R14, R17, R18 and Z are as defined in (1) above.
(112) A compound according to (111) of formula (Va):
Figure imgf000130_0003
(Va) wherein R14, R17, R18 and R20are as defined in (1) above.
(113) A compound according to (ll l) of formula (Vb) :
V:/randrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04
Figure imgf000131_0001
(Vb) wherein R17 and R18 are as defined in (1) above and Z1 is a halogen atom or a group of formula Sn(R20)3 wherein R20 is as defined in (1) above.
(114) A compound according to (ll l) of formula ( Vc) :
"OR 14
(Vc) wherein R14 is as defined in (1) above.
In the intermediates in (73) to (114) above, the substituents therein are as defined and exemplified in the definitions and examples of the methods of the invention above.
The methods of the present invention allows for the first time the synthesis of dictyostatin in substantially pure form, and this also forms a part of the present invention.
(115) Dictyostatin of formula (If) or a salt thereof in substantially pure form:
Figure imgf000131_0002
(116) (-)-Dictyostatin of formula (If) or a salt thereof in substantially pure form:
V:Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04
Figure imgf000132_0001
(117) Dictyostatin according to (115) or (116) having a specific rotation of [α]D = -32.7 (c = 0.22, MeOH).
(118) Dictyostatin according to (115) or (116) having a purity of at least 99 %.
(119) Dictyostatin according to ( 118) having a purity greater of at least 99.3 %.
(120) Dictyostatin according to (118) having a purity greater of at least 99.5 %.
(121) Dictyostatin according to ( 115) or ( 116) having high performance liquid chromatography traces as shown in Figures 10 to 12.
(122) Dictyostatin according to (115) or (116) having a 1H nmr spectrum as shown in Figure 13.
(123) Dictyostatin according to (115) or (116) having a 13C nmr spectrum as shown in Figure 14.
The present invention provides dictyostatin compounds, and uses thereof. These compounds specifically include dictyostatin 1 or a pharmacologically acceptable salt, derivative or analogue thereof having the stereochemical structure shown in Figures 1 through 4, especially dictyostatin having the formula (If) or a salt, derivative or analogue thereof, a compound of formula (Io) or a pharmacologically acceptable salt as defined
V:/Tandre s/Cambridge University/ PP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 above and substantially pure dictyostatin of formula (If) or a pharmacologically acceptable salt thereof as defined above. These new uses include the control of cellular proliferation, cytotoxicity against human tumor cells resistant to chemotherapeutic agents, immunomodulation, and the control of inflammation. These uses arise from the role of dictyostatin compounds as tubulin polymerizers and microtubule stabilizers.
When tubulin is treated with dictyostatin, a rapid onset of polymerization occurs in the absence of cells. This effect is not reversed upon temperature change indicating a long term stabilization of the microtubules. Also, PANC-1 human pancreatic adenoma cells treated with dictyostatin 1 do not undergo mitosis and show pronounced rearrangement of the microtubules in the cells.
The compounds of the present invention have utility in the treatment of various human cancers that may have developed resistance to certain chemotherapeutic agents. Thus, the compounds of the subject invention are useful in the treatment of multi-drug resistant cancers.
In view of the mode of action of the dictyostatin compounds, these compounds can be used in the treatment of a number of conditions in which aberrant cellular proliferation occurs. These conditions include, for example, autoimmune disorders and inflammatory diseases. In addition to use in the treatment of these disorders as well as other conditions involving pathological cellular proliferation, the compounds of the current invention can also be used as biochemical tools to study the process of tubulin polymerization/depolymerization and drug resistance.
In one embodiment, the present invention pertains to the immunosuppressive use of the dictyostatins compounds of the present invention. The dictyostatin compounds of the present invention can be used to reduce, suppress, inhibit, or prevent unwanted immune responses. Thus, the dictyostatin compounds of the present invention are useful for treatments of humans or animals requiring immunosuppression. Examples of conditions for which immunosuppression is desired include, but are not limited to, treatment or prevention of autoimmune diseases such as diabetes, lupus, and rheumatoid arthritis. Immunosuppression is also frequently needed in conjunction with organ transplants. Immunosuppressive agents can also be utilized when a human or animal has been, or may be, exposed to superantigens or other factors known to cause
V./Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12 04 overstimulation of the immune system. The dictyostatin compounds of the present invention are also useful as standards to assess the activity of other putative immunosuppressive agents.
The dictyostatin compounds of the present invention are useful for various non-therapeutic and therapeutic purposes. It is apparent from the testing that the dictyostatin compounds of the present invention are" effective for inhibiting cell growth. ~ Because of the antiproliferative properties of the compounds, they are useful to prevent unwanted cell growth in a wide variety of settings including in vit-o uses. They are also useful as standards and for teaching demonstrations. They can also be used as ultraviolet screeners in the plastics industry since they effectively absorb UV rays. As disclosed herein, they are also useful prophylactically and therapeutically for treating cancer cells in animals and humans.
Therapeutic application of the dictyostatin compounds of the present invention and compositions containing them can be accomplished by any suitable therapeutic method and technique presently or prospectively known to those skilled in the art. Further, the dictyostatin compounds of the present invention have use as starting materials or intermediates for the preparation of other useful compounds and compositions.
As mentioned earlier, the dictyostatins and derivatives, analogues and salts thereof of the present invention can be used in the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer and the prophylaxis or treatment of diseases that can be prevented or treated by compounds capable of stabilising microtubules. They are potentially of particular use against multi- drug resistant cancers where resistance is caused by either pGp or MRP resistance mechanisms. Furthermore, they can also be used in the inhibition of cellular proliferation, e.g. in the prophylaxis or treatment of autoimmune diseases or inflammatory diseases such as diabetes, lupus, rheumatoid arthritis or organ transplant rejection. Thus, the present invention also provides:
( 124) A pharmaceutical composition comprising an effective amount of a pharmacologically active compound together with a carrier or diluent therefor, wherein said pharmacologically active compound is a compound as defined in any one of (50) to
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 (72) above. - - .
(125) A pharmaceutical composition comprising an effective amount of a pharmacologically active compound together with a carrier or diluent therefor, wherein said pharmacologically active compound is substantially pure dictyostatin of formula (If) or a pharmacologically acceptable salt thereof as defined in any one of (115) to (123) above.
(126) A pharmaceutical composition comprising an effective amount of a pharmacologically active compound together with a carrier or diluent therefor, wherein said pharmacologically active compound is dictyostatin 1 or a pharmacologically acceptable salt, derivative or analogue thereof having the stereochemical structure shown in Figures 1 through 4, and preferably dictyostatin having the formula (If) or a salt, derivative or analogue thereof.
(127) A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer, said method comprising administering an effective amount of a cytotoxic compound to a patient suffering from said cancer, wherein said cytotoxic compound is a compound as defined in any one of (50) to (72) above.
(128) A method according to (127), wherein said cancer is selected from the group consisting of leukemia, lung cancer, colon cancer, pancreatic cancer, ovarian cancer, uterine cancer, brain cancer, renal cancer, prostate cancer, breast cancer and melanoma.
(129) A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer, said method comprising administering an effective amount of a cytotoxic compound to a patient suffering from said cancer, wherein said cytotoxic compound is a compound as defined in any one of (115) to (123) above.
(130) A method according to (129), wherein said cancer is selected from the group consisting of leukemia, lung cancer, colon cancer, pancreatic cancer, ovarian cancer,
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge Universit /WPP2?0192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 uterine cancer, brain cancer, renal cancer, prostate cancer, breast cancer and melanoma.
(131) A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer, said method comprising administering an effective amount of a cytotoxic compound to a patient suffering from said cancer, wherein said cytotoxic compound is dictyostatin 1 or a pharmacologically acceptable salt, derivative or analogue thereof having the stereochemical structure shown in Figures 1 through 4, and preferably dictyostatin having the formula (If) or a salt, derivative or analogue thereof.
(132) A method according to (131), wherein said cancer is selected from the group consisting of leukemia, lung cancer, colon cancer, pancreatic cancer, ovarian cancer, uterine cancer, brain cancer, renal cancer, prostate cancer, breast cancer and melanoma.
(133) A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of diseases that can be prevented or treated by compounds capable of stabilising microtubules, said method comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a pharmacologically effective amount of a compound as defined in any one of (50) to (72) above.
(134) A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of diseases that can be prevented or treated by compounds capable of stabilising microtubules, said method comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a pharmacologically effective amount of a compound as defined in any one of (115) to (123) above.
(135) A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of diseases that can be prevented or treated by compounds capable of stabilising microtubules, said method comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a pharmacologically effective amount of dictyostatin 1 or a pharmacologically acceptable salt, derivative or analogue thereof having the stereochemical structure shown in Figures 1 through 4, and preferably dictyostatin having the formula (If) or a salt, derivative or analogue thereof.
(136) A method for inhibiting cellular proliferation in an animal, that may be human,
V: Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 _ __ PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 said method comprising administering to said animal a pharmacologically effective amount of a compound as defined in any one of (50) to (72) above.
(137) A method according to (136), wherein said method is for the prophylaxis or treatment of an autoimmune disease or an inflammatory disease.
(138) A method for inhibiting cellular proliferation in an animal, that may be human, said method comprising administering to said animal a pharmacologically effective amount of a compound as defined in any one of (115) to (123) above.
(139) A method according to (138), wherein said method is for the prophylaxis or treatment of an autoimmune disease or an inflammatory disease.
(140) A method for inhibiting cellular proliferation in an animal, that may be human, said method comprising administering to said animal a pharmacologically effective amount of dictyostatin 1 or a pharmacologically acceptable salt, derivative or analogue thereof having the stereochemical structure shown in Figures 1 through 4, and preferably dictyostatin having the formula (If) or a salt, derivative or analogue thereof.
(141) A method according to (140), wherein said method is for the prophylaxis or treatment of an autoimmune disease or an inflammatory disease.
(142) Use of a compound as defined in any one of (50) to (72) above in the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer.
(143) Use according to (142), wherein said cancer is selected from the group consisting of leukemia, lung cancer, colon cancer, pancreatic cancer, ovarian cancer, uterine cancer, brain cancer, renal cancer, prostate cancer, breast cancer and melanoma.
(144) Use of a compound as defined in any one of (115) to (123) above in the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer.
V./Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 _ PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 (145) Use according to (144), wherein said cancer is selected from the group consisting of leukemia, lung cancer, colon cancer, pancreatic cancer, ovarian cancer, uterine cancer, brain cancer, renal cancer, prostate cancer, breast cancer and melanoma.
(146) Use of dictyostatin 1 or a pharmacologically acceptable salt, derivative or analogue thereof having the stereochemical structure shown in Figures 1 through 4, and preferably dictyostatin having the formula (If) or a salt, derivative or analogue thereof in the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer.
(147) Use according to (146), wherein said cancer is selected from the group consisting of leukemia, lung cancer, colon cancer, pancreatic cancer, ovarian cancer, uterine cancer, brain cancer, renal cancer, prostate cancer, breast cancer and melanoma.
(148) Use of a compound as defined in any one of (50) to (72) above in the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of diseases that can be prevented or treated by compounds capable of stabilising microtubules.
(149) Use of a compound as defined in any one of (115) to (123) above in the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of diseases that can be prevented or treated by compounds capable of stabilising microtubules.
(150) Use of dictyostatin 1 or a pharmacologically acceptable salt, derivative or analogue thereof having the stereochemical structure shown in Figures 1 through 4, and preferably dictyostatin having the formula (If) or a salt, derivative or analogue thereof in the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of diseases that can be prevented or treated by compounds capable of stabilising microtubules.
(151) Use of a compound as defined in any one of (50) to (72) above in the manufacture of a medicament for use in a method of inhibiting cellular proliferation in an animal, that may be human.
V: Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 (152) Use according to (151), wherein said method is for the prophylaxis or treatment of an autoimmune disease or an inflammatory disease.
(153) Use of a compound as defined in any one of (115) to (123) above in the manufacture of a medicament for use in a method of inhibiting cellular proliferation in an animal, that may be human.
(154) Use according to (153), wherein said method is for the prophylaxis or treatment of an autoimmune disease or an inflammatory disease.
(155) Use of dictyostatin 1 or a pharmacologically acceptable salt, derivative or analogue thereof having the stereochemical structure shown in Figures 1 through 4, and preferably dictyostatin having the formula (If) or a salt, derivative or analogue thereof in the manufacture of a medicament for use in a method of inhibiting cellular proliferation in an animal, that may be human.
(156) Use according to (155), wherein said method is for the prophylaxis or treatment of an autoimmune disease or an inflammatory disease.
When the dictyostatins and derivatives, analogues and salts thereof of the present invention are used as a medicament for the treatment or prevention of cancer and diseases that can be prevented or treated by compounds capable of stabilising microtubules, as described above, the dictyostatins and derivatives, analogues and salts thereof of the present invention can be administered alone, and can also be administered orally in a pharmaceutical formulation such as a tablet, capsule, granule, powder or syrup or parenterally in a pharmaceutical formulation such as an injection, suppository, stick preparation or external preparation, by combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, diluent and the like. For example, Remington's Pharmaceutical Science by E.W. Martin describes formulations which can be used in connection with the subject invention.
V: randrews/CambridgeUniversit /WPP290192s2 . . PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 These pharmaceutical formulations can be prepared by well known methods using additives such as a excipients, lubricants, binders, disintegrants, emulsifϊers, stabilizers, corrigents, diluents and the like.
The excipient may be, for example, an organic excipient or an inorganic excipient. Organic excipients include, for example, a sugar derivative such as lactose, sucrose, glucose, mannitol or sorbitol; a starch derivative such as corn starch, potato starch, α-starch, or dextrin; a cellulose derivative such as crystalline cellulose; acacia; dextran; or puUulan. Inorganic excipients may be, for example, a silicate derivative such as light silicic acid anhydride, synthesized aluminum silicate, calcium silicate or magnesium metasilicate aluminate; a phosphate such as calcium hydrogenphosphate; a carbonate such as calcium carbonate; or a sulfate such as calcium sulfate.
The lubricant may be, for example, stearic acid; a metal stearate such as calcium stearate or magnesium stearate; talc; colloidal silica; a wax such as beeswax or spermaceti; boric acid; adipic acid; a sulfate such as sodium sulfate; a glycol; fumaric acid; sodium benzoate; DL-leucine; a lauryl sulfate such as sodium lauryl sulfate or magnesium lauryl sulfate; a silicic acid derivative such as silicic acid anhydride or silicic acid hydrate; or a starch derivative as described above.
The binder may be, for example, hydroxypropyl cellulose, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone, poly(ethylene glycol) or the derivatives described in the above excipient.
The disintegrant may be, for example, a cellulose derivative such as a lower- substituted hydroxypropyl cellulose, carboxymethyl cellulose, calcium carboxymethyl cellulose or sodium internally cross-linked carboxymethyl cellulose; a chemically modified starch-cellulose derivative such as carboxymethyl starch or sodium carboxymethyl starch; or cross-linked polyvinylpyrrolidone.
The emulsifier may be, for example, a colloidal clay such as bentonite or veegum; a metal hydroxide such as magnesium hydroxide or aluminum hydroxide; an anionic surfactant such as sodium lauryl sulfate or calcium stearate; a cationic surfactant such as benzalkonium chloride; or a non-ionic surfactant such as a polyoxyethylenealkylether, a polyoxyethylene sorbitan ester of fatty acid or a sucrose ester of a fatty acid.
V: Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 The stabilizer may be, for example, a parahydroxybenzoic acid ester such as methylparaben or propylparaben; an alcohol such as chlorobutanol, benzyl alcohol or phenethyl alcohol; benzalkonium chloride; a phenol derivative such as phenol or cresol; thimerosal; dehydroacetic acid; or sorbic acid.
The corrigent may be, for example, a conventional sweetening, souring, flavoring agent or the like.
The dosage level of the dictyostatins and derivatives, analogues and salts thereof of the present invention varies depending on the disease being treated, the age of the patient, weight, health, kind of concurrent treatment, if any, frequency of treatment, and therapeutic ratio.
To provide for the administration of such dosages for the desired therapeutic treatment, new pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention will advantageously comprise between about.0.1% and 45%, and especially, 1 and 15%, by weight of the total of one or more of the new compounds based on the weight of the total composition including carrier or diluent. Illustratively, dosage levels of the administered active ingredients can be: intravenous, 0.01 to about 20 mg/kg; intraperitoneal, 0.01 to about 100 mg/kg; subcutaneous, 0.01 to about 100 mg/kg; intramuscular, 0.01 to about 100 mg/kg; orally 0.01 to about 200 mg/kg, and preferably about 1 to 100 mg/kg; intranasal instillation, 0.01 to about 20 mg/kg; and aerosol, 0.01 to about 20 mg/kg of animal (body) weight.
The work of the present inventors shows that the dictyostatins and derivatives, analogues and salts thereof of the present invention are potent inducers of tubulin polymerization and stabilizers of the microtubule network. This activity is useful in the treatment of diseases caused by proliferation of cells including autoimmune and inflammatory processes. Moreover, their work indicates that the dictyostatin class of metabolites are useful in the treatment of multi-drug resistant tumors where resistance is caused by either the pGp or MRP resistance mechanisms.
Additional objects, advantages and novel features of the present invention will become apparent to those skilled in the art by consideration of the following non-limiting examples. The compound numbering in the Examples is as shown in Schemes 1 to 5 above. Reference is made to the following Figures 1 to 15:
V:/Tandre s/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04.. __ . Figure 1 shows the planar structure of dictyostatin.
Figure 2 shows aspects of the stereochemistry of dictyostatin.
Figure 3 shows aspects of the stereochemistry of dictyostatin.
Figure 4 shows aspects of the stereochemistry of dictyostatin.
Figure 5 shows the chemical structure of dictyostatin having formula (If) and discodermolide.
Figure 6 shows 1H NMR spectrum of naturally obtained dictyostatin having formula (If) in CD3OD (700 MHz).
Figure 7 shows NOESY spectrum of naturally obtained dictyostatin having formula (If) in CD3OD (700 MHz).
Figure 8 shows HSQC-HECADE spectrum of naturally obtained dictyostatin having formula (If) in CD3OD (700 MHz).
Figure 9 shows perspective drawings of the lowest energy conformation of dictyostatin having formula (If) generated by Macromodel V 7.2.
. Figure 10 is an HPLC trace observed at 225 nm for dictyostatin having formula (If) prepared according to the method of the present invention.
Figure 11 is an HPLC trace observed at 256 nm for dictyostatin having formula (If) prepared according to the method of the present invention.
Figure 12 is an HPLC trace observed at 263 nm for dictyostatin having formula (If) prepared according to the method of the present invention.
Figure 13 is a 1H nmr spectrum (CD3OD, 500 MHz) for dictyostatin having formula (If) prepared according to the method of the present invention.
Figure 14 is a 13C nmr spectrum (CD3OD, 125 MHz) for dictyostatin having formula (If) prepared according to the method of the present invention.
Figure 15 shows immunofluorescence images of stained A549 cells treated with control, natural and synthetic dictyostatin 1 and paclitaxel.
V: randre s/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 References
[1] Pettit, G. R.; Cichacz, Z. A.; Gao, F.; Boyd, M. R.; Schmidt, J. M. J. Chem. Soc,
Chem. Commun. 1994, 1111.
[2] Isbrucker, R. A.; Cummins, J.; Pomponi, S: A.; Longley, R. E.; Wright, A. E.
Biochem. Pharm. 2003, 66, 75.
[3] Pettit, G. R.; Cichacz, Z. A., U.S. Patent No 5,430,053, 1995, contains a partial stereochemical assignment for dictyostatin which differs significantly from our findings.
[4] The structural similarities between discodermolide and dictyostatin and the scope for preparing hybrid structures have also been highlighted by Curran and Day, see: Shin, Y.;
Choy, N.; Balachandran, R.; Madiraju, C; Day, B. W.; Curran, D. P. Org. Lett. 2002, 4,
4443.
[5] Mooberry, S. L.; Tien, G.; Hernandez, A. H.; Plubrukam, A.; Davidson, B. S. Cancer
Res. 1999, 59, 653.
[6] Hood, K. A.; West, L. M.; Rouwe, B.; Northcote, P. T.; Berridge, M. V.; Wakefield,
S. J.; Miller, J. H. Cancer Res. 2002, 62, 3356.
[7] a) ter Haar, E.; Kowalski, R. J.; Hamel, E.; Lin, C. M.; Longley, R. E.; Gunasekera, S.
P.; Rosenkranz, H. S.; Day, B. W. Biochemistry 1996, 35, 243. b) Review: Paterson, I.;
Florence, G. J. Eur. J. Org. Chem. 2003, 12, 2193.
[8] Paterson, I.; Delgado, O.; Florence, G. J.; Lyothier, I.; Scott, J. P.; Sereinig, N. Org.
Lett. 2003, 5, 35.
[9] Garegg, P. J.; Samuelson, B. J. Chem. Soc, Perkin Trans.71980, 2866.
[10] Myers, A. G.; Yang, B. H.; Chen, H.; McKinstry, L.; Kopecky, D. J.; Gleason, J. L.
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 1997, 119, 6496.
V: Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 [11] The 1,3-syn stereochemistry of amide 13 was confirmed by nOe enhancements on lactone i obtained via a 2-step sequence (1. 2N HCI, EtOH; 2. TEMPO, P (OAc)2) from alcohol ii (see Scheme 29 below).
Scheme 29
Figure imgf000144_0001
[12] a) Paterson, I.; Florence, G. J.; Gerlach, K.; Scott, J. P. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. 2000,
39, 377. b) Paterson, I.; Florence, G. J.; Gerlach, K.; Scott, J. P.; Sereinig, N. J. Am.
Chem. Soc. 2001, 123, 9535.
[13] Paterson, I.; Yeung, K.-S.; Smaill . B. Synlett 1993, 774.
[14] Mahoney, W. S.; Brestensky, D. M.; Stryker, J. M. J. Am. Chem. Soc. 1988, 110,
291.
[15] Oishi, T.; Nakata, T. Ace. Chem. Res. 1984, 17, 338.
[16] The relative stereochemistry of 16 was confirmed unequivocally by NMR experiments performed on the corresponding acetonide.
[17] De Mico, A.; Margarita, R.; Parlanti, L.; Vescovi, A.; Piancatelli, G. J. Org. Chem.
1997, 62, 691 A.
[18] Still, W. C; Gennari, C. Tetrahedron Lett. 1983, 24, 4405.
[19] a) Brown, H. C; Bhat, K. S.; Randad, R. S. J. Org. Chem. 1989, 54, 1570. b)
Paterson, I; Ashton, K.; Britton, R.; Knust, H. Org. Lett. 2003, J, 1963.
[20] Takai, K.; Nitta, K.; Utimoto, K. J. Am. Chem. Soc. 1986, 108, 7408.
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 [21] Devos, A.; Remion, J.; Frisque-Hesbain, A. M.; Colens, A.; Ghosez, L. J. Chem.
Soc, Chem. Commun. 1979, 1180.
[22] Patois, C; Savignac, P.; About-Jadet, E.; Collignon, N. Synth. Commun. 1991, 21,
2391.
[23] Allied, G. D.; Liebeskind, L. S. J Am. Chem. Soc. 1996, 118, 2748.
[24] Crichter, D. J.; Pattenden, G. Tetrahedron Lett. 1996, 37, 9107.
[25] Inanaga, J.; Hirata, K.; Saeki, H.; Katsuki, T.; Yamaguchi, M. Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn.
1979, 52, 1989.
[26] Luche, J. L. J. Am. Chem. Soc. 1978, 100, 2226. .
[27] In comparison, the specific rotation for dictyostatin- 1 reported by Pettit et al. (ref 1) was -20 (c 0.12, MeOH).
V:/Tandrews/Cambridge University/WPP290192s2 PCT description/CUTS & Harbor Branch/29.12.04 Example 1 Preparation of Keto-Phosphonate 7
1(a) Preparation of hydroxyphosphonate 28 from aldehyde 14
Figure imgf000146_0001
28
A solution of dimethyl methyl phosphonate (412 μL, 3.80 mmol) in 25 mL THF cooled to -78 °C was treated with a 1.6M solution of rc-BuLi in hexanes (2.25 mL, 3.61 mmol). After 30 min, a solution of freshly prepared aldehyde 14 (287 mg, 1.0 mmol) (prepared from 1,3-diol 8 as described in references 9 and 12) in THF (10 mL), precooled to -78 °C, was added via cannula. After 20 min, the reaction was quenched with 60 mL brine. The aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc (3x). The combined organics were dried (MgSO4), filtered and the volatiles were removed in vacuo. The residue was purified by flash chromatography (SiO2, EtOAc) to afford recovered aldehyde (42 mg, 14%) and a 1:1 mixture of hydroxyphosphonates 28 (345 mg, 84%) as a yellow oil. Rf 0.28 (EtOAc); 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDC13) δ 7.29-7.23 (4H, m), 6.60-6.84 (4H, m), 6.75-6.63 (2H, m), 6.10-6.03 (2H, m), 5.58-5.49 (2H, m), 5.27-5.20 (2H, m), 5.17-5.11 (2H, m), 4.70-4.60 (2H, m), 4.50-4.53 (2H, m), 4.20- 4.12 (IH, m), 3.98-3.89 (IH, m), 3.80 (6H, s), 3.78-3.74 (12H, m), 3.66 (IH, dd, J = 8.5, 2.5 Hz), 3.51-3.45 (3H, m), 3.08 (IH, ddq, J = 8.4, 8.3, 6.9 Hz), 2.97 (IH, ddq, J = 10.0, 7.1, 6.9 Hz), 2.13-1.97 (2H, m), 1.90-1.80 (2H, m), 1.07 (3H, d, J = 6.9 Hz), 1.02 (3H, d, J - 7.0 Hz), 0.99 (3H, d, J = 6.9 Hz), 0.93 (3H, d, J = 6.9 Hz); 13C NMR (125 MHz, CDCls) δ 159.1, 159.0, 135.8, 134.8, 132.6, 132.3, 140.0, 130.5, 129.4 (2C), 129.3, 129.1, 85.6, 82.2, 74.2, 73.8, 68.6 (2C), 68.2 (2C), 55.2 (2C), 52.5-52.2 (m, 4C), 41.4 (d, J = 15.0 Hz), 41.2 (d, J = 14.0 Hz), 35.7, 35.4, 31.3, 30.8, 30.2, 29.8, 18.3, 18.0, 10.0, 7.2; IR (Thin Film) 3357, 2958, 1613, 1514, 1459, 1247; HRMS (+ESI) calcd for C2ιH34O6P [M+H]: 413.2088. Found: 413.2085.
Example 1(b) Conversion of hydroxyphosphonate 28 to ketophosphonate 7
Figure imgf000147_0001
28
A solution of hydroxyphosphonates 28 prepared in Example 1(a) above (345 mg, 0.84 mmol) in 16 mL CH2C12 was treated with Dess-Martin periodinane (424 mg, 1.0 mmol). After 30 min, the slurry was partitioned between sodium thiosulphate (50 mL), NaHCO3 (50 mL) and Et2O (40 mL). The organic layer was washed with brine (20 mL), dried (MgSO4) and the volatiles were removed in vacuo. The residue was purified by flash chromatography (SiO2, EtOAc) to afford ketophoshonate 7 (345 mg, 100 %) as a yellow oil. Rf 0.42 (EtOAc); [α]D 20 -2.8 (c 1.7, CHC13); 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) δ 7.25 (2H, d, J = 8.6 Hz), 6.86 (2H, d, J = 8.6 Hz), 6.50 (IH, ddd, J= 16.8, 11.6, 10.6 Hz), 6.02 (IH, dd, J = 11.6, 10.8 Hz), 5.51 (IH, dd, J = 10.8, 10.7 Hz), 5.21 (IH, dd, J = 16.8, 2.0 Hz), 5.12 (IH, d, J= 10.2 Hz), 4.58-4.49 (2H, m), 3.80 (3H, s), 3.76 (3H, d, J = 11.3 Hz), 3.74 (3H, d, J = 11.3 Hz), 3.59 (IH, dd, J = 6.3, 4.0 Hz), 3.30 (IH, dd, J = 22.1, 14.6 Hz), 3.02-2.92 (2H, m), 2.86-2.76 (IH, m), 1.20 (3H, d, J = 7.0 Hz), 1.06 (3H, d, J = 7.0 Hz); 13C NMR (125 MHz, CDC13) δ 204.6 (d, J = 3.8 Hz), 159.2, 133.5, 132.1, 130.4, 129.9, 129.4, 118.1, 113.7, 83.5, 74.2, 55.2, 52.9, 50.6, 41.3, 40.3, 35.8, 18.9, 12.7; TR (Thin Film) 2959, 1711, 1574, 1248; HRMS (+ESI) calcd for C2ιH32O6P [M+H]: 411.1931. Found: 411.1932. Example 2 Preparation of bis-silyl ether 9 from 1,3-diol 8
Figure imgf000148_0001
A solution of diol 8 (4.267 g, 15.91 mmol) in 150 mL CH2C12 cooled to -78 °C was successively treated with 2,6-lutidine (4.3 mL, 36.59 mmol) and TBSOTf (8.0 mL, 35.01 mmol). After wamiing to RT over 2 h, the volatiles were removed in vacuo and the residue was purified by flash chromatography (SiO2, hexanes/EtOAc, 9:1) to provide bis-TBS-ether 9 (7.88 g, 99%) as a colorless oil. Rf 0.73 (hexanes/EtOAc, 9:1); [α]D 20 = -4.5 (c 0.5, CH2C12); 1H NMR (CDC13, 500 MHz) δ 7.27 (d, J = 8.5 Hz, 2H), 6.89 (d, J= 8.5 Hz, 2H), 4.44 (d, J= 12.6 Hz, 2H), 3.82 (s, 3H), 3.75 (dd, J = 2.2, 6.6 Hz, IH), 3.55 (dd, J= 4.7, 9.1 Hz, IH), 3.48 (dd, J= 7.5, 9.7 Hz, IH), 3.39 (dd, J= 6.9, 9.8 Hz, IH), 3.24 (app t, J= 8.1 Hz, IH), 1.93-2.01 (m, IH), 1.78 (d-hex, J= 1.9, 6.9 Hz, IH), 0.98 (d, J= 6.9 Hz, 3H), 0.91 (d, J= 4.7 Hz, 9H), 0.85 (d, J = 6.9 Hz, 3H), 0.05 (app t, J = 5.0 Hz, 6H); 13C NMR (CDC13, 125 MHz) δ 159.0, 131.0, 129.0, 113.7, 73.1, 73.0, 72.7, 66.1, 55.3, 38.7, 38.5, 26.1, 25.9, 25.7, 18.4, 18.1, 14.7, 10.8, -4.1, -5.3; IR (CH2C12) v 2989, 1393, 1249, 1066 cm-1; HRMS (+ESI) calcd for C27H52O4Si2 [M+H]: 497.3477. Found: 497.3468.
Example 3 Preparation of alcohol 10 from bis-silyl ether 9
Figure imgf000148_0002
A solution of bis-TBS ether 9 (9.76 g, 19.67 mmol) prepared in Example 2 above in 100 mL THF/H2O (20:1) was treated with ^-toluenesulfonic acid (1.12 g, 5.9 mmol). After 18 h at RT, 50 mL of saturated NaHCO3 was added to the reaction mixture. The aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc (2x). The combined organics were dried (MgSO4), filtered and the volatiles were removed in vacuo. The residue was purified by flash chromatography (SiO2, hexanes/EtOAc, 7:3) to provide alcohol 10 (6.99 g, 93%) as a colorless oil. Rf 0.13 (hexanes/EtOAc, 9:1); [α]D 20 = -0.3 (c 0.5, CH2C12); 1H NMR (CDC13, 400 MHz) δ 7.25 (d, J= 7.7 Hz, 2H), 6.87 (d, J= 7.7 Hz, 2H), 4.42 (d, J= 11.8 Hz, 2H), 3.80 (s, 3H), 3.74 (dd, J= 2.8, 5.6 Hz, IH), 3.53 (dd, J= 5.6, 8.9 Hz, IH), 3.45-3.50 (m, 2H), 3.27 (dd, J= 7.1, 9.0 Hz, IH), 2.04 (app heptet, J = 5.1 Hz, IH), 1.97 (br t, J= 5.2 Hz, IH), 1.83-1.91 (m, IH), 0.96 (d, J= 7.0 Hz, 3H), 0.88 (s, 9H), 0.86 (d, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H), 0.05 (d, J = 8.5 Hz, 6H); 13C NMR (CDC13, 100 MHz) δ 159.1, 130.6, 129.2, 113.7, 74.8, 72.7, 66.2, 55.2, 39.0, 37.6, 26.0, 18.3, 15.0, 11.9, -4.2; IR (CH2C12) v 3426, 2929, 1513, 1247, 1035 cm-1; HRMS (+ESI) calcd for C21H38O4Si [M+H]: 383.2612. Found: 383.2605.
Example 4 Preparation of iodide 11 from alcohol 10
Figure imgf000149_0001
A solution of alcohol 10 (1.21 g, 3.18 mmol) prepared in Example 3 above, triphenylphosphine (833.9 mg, 3.18 mmol) and imidazole (216.5 mg, 3.18 mmol) in 30 L toluene cooled to 0 °C was treated with a solution of iodine (806.9 mg, 3.18 mmol) in 10 mL toluene. After 45 min, the reaction mixture was poured over Et2O/H2O. The aqueous layer was extracted with Et2O. The combined organics were dried (MgSO4), filtered and the volatiles were removed in vacuo. The residue was purified by flash chromatography (SiO2, Pet. Ether/CH2C1 , 7:3) to provide iodide 11 (1.35 g, 86%) as a colorless oil. Rf 0.72 (hexanes/EtOAc, 3:2); [α]D 20 = +15.1 (c 1.04, CH2C12); 1H NMR (CDC13, 400 MHz) δ 7.25 (d, J= 7.1 Hz, 2H), 6.88 (d, J = 8.7 Hz, 2H), 4.41 (d, J= 11.3 Hz, 2H), 3.81 (s, 3H), 3.68 (dd, J= 2.8, 5.9 Hz, IH), 3.50 (dd, J= 4.7, 9.2 Hz, IH), 3.19-3.26 (m, 2H), 3.11 (dd, J= 7.3, 9.4 Hz, IH), 1.86- 1.99 (m, 2H), 0.99 (d, J= 6.8 Hz, 3H), 0.94 (d, J= 6.8 Hz, 3H), 0.88 (s, 9H), 0.07 (s, 3H), 0.05 (s, 3H); 13C NMR (CDC13, 125 MHz) δ 159.1, 130.7, 129.2, 113.8, 76.2, 72.7, 72.3, 55.3, 39.6, 38.1, 26.1, 18.8, 15.3, 14.5, -4.1; IR (CH2C12) v 2989, 1394, 1066 cm-1, HRMS (+ESI) calcd for C2lH37IO3Si [M+NILJ: 510.1895. Found: 510.1902.
Example 5 Preparation of aldehyde 6'
5(a) Preparation of alcohol 29 from iodide 11
Figure imgf000150_0001
A solution of diisopropylamine (2 mL, 14.177 mmol) in 20 mL THF cooled to -78 °C and LiCl (1.43 g, 33.754 mmol) was treated with a 1.6M solution of 77-BuLi in hexanes (8.6 mL, 13.839 mmol). The mixture was allowed to stir at 0 °C for 20 min, was cooled to -78 °C and treated with a solution of (+)-pseudoephedrine propionamide 12 (1.49 g, 6.750 mmol) in 10 mL THF. The reaction rnixture was stirred at -78 °C for 1 h, at 0 °C for 15 min and rt for 5 min. The enolate was cooled to 0 °C and treated with a solution of iodide 11 (831.2 mg, 1.688 mmol) in 10 mL THF. After 18 h at RT, the reaction was partitioned between half saturated NFLjCl (20 mL) and EtOAc (2x). The combined organics were dried (MgSO4), filtered and the volatiles were removed in vacuo. The residue was purified by flash chromatography (SiO2, hexanes/EtOAc, 3:2) to afford amide 13 (872.4 mg, 88%) as a mixture of rotamers. A suspension of BH3-NH3 (184.0 mg, 5.961 mmol) in 20 mL THF at 0 °C was treated with freshly prepared LDA (3.9 mmol) and allowed to stir at rt. Thre resulting LAB solution was cooled to 0 °C and treated with a solution of amide 13 (872.4 mg, 1.490 mmol). After 18 h at rt, the reaction was quenched at 0 °C with 15 mL 3N HCI. After 10 min at 0 °C, the aqueous layer was extracted with Et2O. The combined organics were dried (MgSO4), filtered and the volatiles were removed in vacuo. The residue was purified by flash chromatography (SiO2, hexanes/EtOAc, 4:1) to give the target alcohol 29. Rf 0.50 (hexanes/EtOAc, 3:2); [α]D 20 = -14.3 (c 0.45, CH2C12); 1H NMR (CDC13, 500 MHz) δ 7.27 (d, J= 8.5 Hz, 2H), 6.89 (d, J= 8.5 Hz, 2H), 4.42 (d, J= 11.9 Hz, 2H), 3.82 (s, 3H), 3.55 (dd, J= 5.3, 9.1 Hz, IH), 3.49-3.53 (m, IH), 3.46 (dd, J= 2.8, 5.6 Hz, IH), 3.36-3.41 (m, IH), 3.24 (dd, J= 6.9, 9.1 Hz, IH), 2.00 (app heptet, J= 5.9 Hz, IH), 1.71-1.79 ( , IH), 1.65-1.71 (m, IH), 1.47 (br t, J = 6.0 Hz, IH), 1.39-1.45 (m, IH), 0.96 (d, J = 4.7 Hz, 3H), 0.88 (d, J= 4.4 Hz, 3H), 0.05 (s, 3H), 0.04 (s, 3H); 13C NMR (CDC13, 125 MHz) δ 159.1, 130.8, 129.2, 113.7, 77.4, 72.7, 67.3, 55.3, 38.2, 37.9, 33.5, 33.1, 26.2, 18.5, 17.8, 15.4, -3.6, -4.0; IR (CH2C12) v 3397, 2929, 1513, 1247, 1037 cm"1; HRMS (+ESI) calcd for C^HμO^i [M+Na]: 447.2907. Found: 447.2935.
5(b) Preparation of aldehyde 6' from alcohol 29
Figure imgf000151_0001
A solution of alcohol 29 (223.2 mg, 0.526 mmol) in 10 mL CH2C12 cooled to 0 °C was treated with TEMPO (16.4 mg, 0.105 mmol) and BAIB (254.1 mg, 0.789 mmol). After 18 h at rt, the volatiles were removed in vacuo and the residue was purified by flash chromatography (SiO2, hexanes/EtOAc, 9:1) to afford aldehyde 6' (177.5 mg, 80%) as a colorless oil. Rf 0.30 (hexanes/EtOAc, 9:1); [α]D 20 = -18.2 (c 0.44, CH2C12); 1H MR (CDC13, 400 MHz) δ 9.53 (d, J= 2.4 Hz, IH), 7.24 (d, J= 8.7 Hz, 2H), 6.87 (d, J= 8.7 Hz, 2H), 4.40 (d, J= 11.5 Hz, 2H), 3.80 (s, 3H), 3.50 (d, J= 5.6 Hz, IH), 3.49 (dd, J = 5.6, 12.7 Hz, IH), 3.25 (dd, J = 7.5, 9.0 Hz, IH), 2.40 (app hexet, J= 6.6 Hz, IH), 1.94 (app heptet, J= 6.1 Hz, IH), 1.79 (ddd, J= 5.4, 8.0, 13.4 Hz, IH), 1.62-1.73 (m, IH), 1.19 (ddd, J= 5.7, 8.9, 14.4 Hz, IH), 1.07 (d, J= 7.0 Hz, 3H), 0.94 (d, J= 7.0 Hz, 3H), 0.89 (s, 9H), 0.87 (d, J= 7.0 Hz, 3H), 0.03 (s, 6H); 13C NMR (CDC13, 100 MHz) δ 205.1, 159.1, 130.8, 129.1, 113.7, 72.7, 55.2, 44.2, 38.0, 35.9, 33.7, 26.1, 18.4, 15.1, 14.5, 14.3, -3.7, -4.1; IR (CH2C12) v 2930, 1726, 1513, 1247, 1037 cm-1, HRMS (+ESI) calcd for C24H 2O4Si [M+Na]: 445.2750. Found: 445.2750.
Example 6 Preparation of enone 15 from aldehyde 6'
Figure imgf000152_0001
A suspension of dry Ba(OH)2-8H2O (753.9 mg, 2.389 mmol) in 20 mL anhydrous THF was treated with a solution of phosphonate 7 produced in Example 1 above (980.2 mg, 2.389 mmol) in 10 mL THF. After 1 h, a solution of aldehyde 6' produced in Example 5 above (841.0 mg, 1.991 mmol) in 10 mL THF/H2O (40:1) was added to the phosphonate. After 18 h, 50 mL CH2C12 and MgSO4 was added and the mixture was filtered through celite. The volatiles were removed in vacuo and the residue was purified by flash chromatography (SiO2, hexanes/EtOAc, 4:1) to afford enone 15 (1.361 g, 97%) as a colorless oil. Rf 0.30 (hexanes/EtOAc, 9:1); [α]D 20 = +16.1 (c 0.21, CH2C12); 1H NMR (CDC13, 400 MHz) δ 7.27 (d, J = 8.7 Hz, 2H), 7.24 (d, J =
8.7 Hz, 2H), 6.87 (d, J= 8.7 Hz, 4H), 6.68 (dd, J= 8.3, 15.8 Hz, IH), 6.39 (app dt, J = 10.6, 16.7 Hz, IH), 6.03 (d, J= 15.8 Hz, IH), 6.00 (app t, J= 11.0 Hz, IH), 5.52 (app t, J= 10.6 Hz, IH), 5.14 (d, J= 16.7 Hz, IH), 5.00 (d, J= 10.3 Hz, IH), 4.54 (d, J= 10.6 Hz, 2H), 4.39 (d, J= 11.7 Hz, 2H), 3.78 (s, 6H), 3.68 (dd, J= 3.1, 8.2 Hz, IH), 3.48 (dd, J= 4.7, 9.0 Hz, IH), 3.43 (dd, J= 2.3, 6.3 Hz, IH), 3.23 (app t, J= 8.5 Hz, IH), 2.92 (app pentet, J= 7.8 Hz, IH), 2.72-2.81 (m, IH), 2.33 (app heptet, J = 7.0 Hz, IH), 1.85-1.96 (m, IH), 1.54-1.63 (m, IH), 1.40 (ddd, J= 4.7, 8.9, 13.4 Hz, IH), 1.20-1.28 (m, IH), 1.18 (d, J= 6.8 Hz, 3H), 1.08 (d, J= 6.8 Hz, 3H), 1.00 (d, J=
6.8 Hz, 3H), 0.92 (d, J= 6.8 Hz, 3H), 0.88 (s, 9H), 0.82 (d, J= 6.8 Hz, 3H), 0.01 (s, 3H), 0.00 (s, 3H); 13C NMR (CDC13, 100 MHz) δ 203.1, 159.0, 152.8, 134.0, 132.4, 130.8, 129.6, 129.3, 129.1, 127.9, 117.4, 113.7, 84.2, 75.3, 72.7, 55.2, 48.5, 41.1, 37.9, 36.4, 34.3, 33.8, 26.1, 20.2, 28.9, 28.4, 15.3, 14.4, 14.1, -3.6, -4.1; IR (CH2C12) v 2958, 1690, 1664, 1613, 1513, 1247, 1038 cm"1, HRMS (+ESI) calcd for C43H66O6Si [M+H]: 707.4701. Found: 707.4696.
Example 7 Preparation of ketone 30 from enone 15
Figure imgf000153_0001
A solution of enone 15 prepared in Example 6 above (469.2 mg, 0.664 mmol) in 25 mL deoxygenated toluene was cannulated directly into a flask containing [Ph3PCuH]6 (390.7 mg, 0.199 mmol). After 18 h under argon, the volatiles were removed in vacuo and the residue was purified by flask chromatography (SiO2, hexanes/EtOAc, 9:1) to afford ketone 30 (438.9 mg, 93%) as a colorless oil. Rf 0.38 (hexanes/EtOAc, 9:1); [ ]D 20 = +L2 (c 0.60, CH2C12); 1H NMR (CDC13, 500 MHz) δ 7.28 (d, J = 8.5 Hz, 2H), 7.27 (d, J= 8.5 Hz, 2H), 6.89 (d, J= 8.5 Hz, 4H), 6.46 (app dt, J= 10.7, 17.0 Hz, IH), 6.05 (app t, J= 11.0 Hz, IH), 5.55 (app t, J= 10.7 Hz, IH), 5.20 (d, J= 16.1 Hz, IH), 5.09 (d, J= 10.4 Hz, IH), 4.58 (d, J= 10.4 Hz, IH), 4.52 (d, J= 10.4 Hz, IH), 4.43 (d, J= 11.37 Hz, 2H), 3.82 (s, 6H), 3.66 (dd, J= 3.4, 8.2 Hz, IH), 3.54 (dd, J= 4.4, 9.1 Hz, IH), 3.46 (dd, J= 2.5, 6.3 Hz, IH), 3.26 (app t, J= 8.5 Hz, IH), 2.79 (ddd, J= 3.1, 6.9, 10.1 Hz, IH), 2.75 (app pentet, J= 7.6 Hz, IH), 2.37-2.44 (m, IH), 1.92-1.99 (m, IH), 1.70-1.76 (m, IH), 1.62-1.69 (m, IH), 1.37-1.46 (m, IH), 1.23- 1.30 (m, IH), 1.19 (d, J= 7.2 Hz, 3H), 1.11 (d, J= 6.9 Hz, 3H), 1.00-1.08 (m, IH), 0.97 (d, J= 6.9 Hz, 3H), 0.90 (s, 9H), 0.85 (d, J= 6.9 Hz, 3H), 0.82 (d, J= 6.6 Hz, 3H), 0.05 (s, 3H), 0.04 (s, 3H); 13C NMR (CDC13, 125 MHz) o 214.3, 159.1, 134.0, 132.1, 130.9, 130.8, 129.6, 129.3, 129.1, 117.8, 113.7, 83.8, 75.3, 73.0, 72.7, 55.3, 50.4, 42.6, 40.3, 38.2, 36.2, 33.2, 29.7, 26.2, 20.0, 18.8, 18.5, 15.2, 14.7, 14.0, -3.6, - 4.0; IR (CH2C12) v 2929, 1709, 1613, 1513, 1247, 1037 cm"1; HRMS (+ESI) calcd for C43H68O6Si [M+Na]: 731.4677. Found: 731.4665.
Example 8 Preparation of diol 31 from ketone 30
Figure imgf000154_0001
Ketone precursor to 15. A biphasic mixture of ketone 30 prepared in Example 7 above (438.9 mg, 0.619 mmol) in 20 mL CH2C12 and 6 mL pH 7 buffer cooled to 0 °C was treated with DDQ (351.6 mg, 1.549 mmol). After 4 h at RT, the aqueous layer was extracted with CH2C12. The combined organics were dried (MgSO4), filtered and the volatiles were removed in vacuo. The residue was purified by flash chromatography (SiO2, Pet. Ether/Et2O, 1:1) to provide diol 31 (226.5 mg, 78 %) as a colorless oil. Rf 0.44 (hexanes/EtOAc, 3:2); [α]D 20 = - 5.2 (c 0.13, CH2C12); 1H NMR (CDC13, 500 MHz) δ 6.56 (app dt, J = 10.7, 17.0 Hz, IH), 6.12 (app t, J= 11.0 Hz, IH), 5.41 (app t, J= 10.7 Hz, IH), 5.23 (d, J= 16.0 Hz, IH), 5.13 (d, J = 10.1 Hz, IH), 3.74 (dd, J= 4.7, 6.6 Hz, IH), 3.58-3.61 (m, 2H), 3.48 (dd, J= 3.7, 5.3 Hz, IH),
2.75 (app dp, J = 7.2, 9.8 Hz, IH), 2.67 (app d heptet, J= 2.2, 7.2 Hz, IH), 2.48 (app t, J= 7.9 Hz, 2H), 1.86 fø?p heptet, J= 6.3 Hz, IH), 1.66-1.79 (m, 2H), 1.41-1.51 (m, IH), 1.31-1.138 (m, IH), 1.18-1.25 (m, IH), 1.17 (d, J= 7.2 Hz, 3H), 1.04-1.11 (m, IH), 1.00 (d, J= 6.6 Hz, 3H), 0.95 (d, J= 6.9 Hz, 3H), 0.92 (s, 9H), 0.89 (d, J= 6.6 Hz, 3H), 0.87 (d, J= 6.6 Hz, 3H), 0.11 (s, 3H), 0.09 (s, 3H); 13C NMR (CDC13, 125 MHz) δ 214.9, 133.9, 132.0, 130.6, 118.3, 80.7, 75.1, 66.1, 48.5, 41.3, 39.1, 38.2, 35.5, 35.1, 29.8, 29.4, 26.1, 20.3, 18.3, 17.6, 16.2, 15.4, 10.6, -3.8, -4.0; IR (CH2C12) v 3405, 2968, 1709, 1613, 1513, 1247, 1066 cm-1; HRMS (+ESI) calcd for C27H52O4Si [M+H]: 469.3708. Found: 469.3710.
Example 9 Preparation of triol 16 from diol 31
Figure imgf000155_0001
A solution of hydroxy-ketone 31 prepared in Example 8 above (79.2 mg, 0.169 mmol) in 2 mL Et2O cooled to -30 °C was treated with a 0.5 M solution of Zn(BF t)2 (1.4 mL, 0.676 mmol). After 30 min, the reaction was quenched with 2 mL saturated NHtCl and 2 mL IN HCI. After 20 min at rt, the aqueous layer was extracted with Et2O (3x). The combined organics were dried (MgSO4), filtered and i e volatiles were removed in vacuo. - The residue was purified by flash chromatography (SiO2, hexanes/EtOAc, 3:2) to provide triol 16 (70.2 mg, 88%) as a colorless oil. Rf 0.30 (hexanes/EtOAc, 3:2); [α]D 2° = - 3.4 (c 0.27, CH2C12); 1H NMR (CDC13, 500 MHz) δ 6.65 (app dt, J= 10.4, 17 Hz, IH), 6.21 (app t, J= 11.0 Hz, IH), 5.27 (dd, J= 5.0, 9.7 Hz, IH), 5.19 (d, J= 10.7 Hz, IH), 3.78 (app t, J= 5.6 Hz, IH), 3.61 (d, J= 4.1 Hz, 2H), 3.45-3.51 (m, 2H), 3.39 (br s, IH), 2.83 (app hex, J = 6.9 Hz, IH), 2.54 (br s, IH), 2.33 (br s, IH), 1.87 (app heptet, J= 5.3 Hz, IH), 1.68-1.80 (m, 2H), 1.45-1.59 (m, 3H), 1.33-1.41 (m, IH), 1.04-1.12 (m, IH), 0.94-0.98 (m, 12H), 0.93 (s, 9H), 0.89-0.92 (m, 6H), 0.12 (s, 3H), 0.10 (s, 3H); 13C NMR (CDC13, 125 MHz) δ 134.3, 131.9, 118.9, 113.7, 81.0, 80.6, 77.2, 66.1, 41.4, 38.1, 37.1, 36.4, 35.3, 32.5, 32.3, 30.5, 26.1, 20.6, 18.3, 16.7, 16.2, 15.5, 4.2, -3.8, -4.0; IR (CH2C12) v 3425, 2958, 1711, 1610, 1513, 1247, 1037 cm-1; HRMS (+ESI) calcd for C27H54O4Si [M+H]: 471.3864. Found: 471.3861.
Example 10 Preparation of tris-silyl ether 17 from triol 16
Figure imgf000156_0001
16
A solution of triol 16 prepared in Example 9 above (84.1 mg, 0.179 mmol) in 3 mL CH2C12 cooled to 0 °C was treated with 2,6-lutidine (73 μL, 0.626 mmol) and TBSOTf (135 μL, 0.590 mmol. After 1 h at RT, the volatiles were removed in vacuo and the residue was purified by flash chromatography (SiO2, hexanes/EtOAc, 9:1) to provide TBS-ether 17 (114.3 mg, 91%) as a colorless oil. Rf 0.52 (hexanes/EtOAc, 9:1); [α]D 20 = - 11.4 (c 0.73, CH2C12); 1H NMR (CDC13, 400 MHz) δ 6.63 (app dt, J= 10.4, 17.1 Hz, IH), 6.09 (app t, J= 10.8 Hz, IH), 5.41 (app t, J= 10.4 Hz, IH), 5.20 (d, J= 16.7 Hz, IH), 5.12 (d, J= 9.7 Hz, IH), 3.73-3.78 (m, IH), 3.65 (dd, J= 5.0, 9.7 Hz, IH), 3.44-3.52 (m, 2H), 3.40 (dd, J = 7.1, 9.7 Hz, IH), 2.74-2.85 (m, IH), 2.26 (d, J = 1.9 Hz, IH), 1.59-1.82 (m, 5H), 1.37-1.47 (m, 2H), 1.20-1.32 (m, 2H), 1.01-1.08 (m, IH), 0.96 (d, J= 6.8 Hz, 3H), 0.84-0.93 (m, 36H), 0.82 (d, J= 6.8 Hz, 3H), 0.01-0.09 (m, 18H); 13C NMR (CDC13, 100 MHz) δ 135.3, 132.3, 130.0, 117.7, 77.6, 76.5, 65.7, 43.0, 40.6, 37.6, 36.1, 32.7, 32.0, 31.7, 30.3, 26.2, 25.9, 20.1, 18.5, 18.3, 18.1, 17.7, 14.4, 14.3, 6.9, -3.7, -3.9, -4.4, -5.3; IR (CH2C12) v 2929, 1472, 1387, 1253, 1085; HRMS (+ESI) calcd for C39H82O4Si3 [M+Na]: 721.5413. Found: 721.5424.
Example 11 Preparation of diol 18 from tris-silyl ether 17
Figure imgf000157_0001
A solution of TBS-ether 17 prepared in Example 10 above (95 mg, 0.136 mmol) in 2 mL THF was treated with 800 μL of a 0.9 M solution of TBAF/AcOH (1:1) in THF. After 18 h, another 500 μL of the TBAF solution was added to the reaction mixture. After 18 h at RT, the crude product was directly purified by flash chromatography (SiO2, hexanes/EtOAc, 10:1) to afford diol 18 (80.0 mg, 100%) as a crystalline solid. Rf (hexanes/EtOAc, 9:1), 1H NMR (CDC13, 500 MHz) δ 6.65 (app dt, J= 10.4, 17.0 Hz, IH), 6.12 (app t, J= 11.0 Hz, IH), 5.43 (app t, J= 10.1 Hz, IH), 5.23 (d, J= 17.0 Hz, IH), 5.14 (d, J= 10.1 Hz, IH), 3.74-3.79 (m, IH), 3.61 (app t, J= 5.4 Hz, IH), 3.49 (dd, J = 3.4, 5.6 Hz, IH), 2.82 (app hex, J = 6.9 Hz, IH), 2.43 (t, J = 5.6 Hz, IH), 2.28 (br s, IH), 1.86 (app heptet, J= 6.0 Hz, IH) 1.69-1.77(m, 52H), 1.60-1.68 (m, IH), 1.39-1.48 (m, 2H), 1.27-1.37 (m, 2H), 1.04-1.11 (m, IH), 0.98 (d, J = 6.9 Hz, 3H), 0.97 (d, J= 7.2 Hz, 3H), 0.94 (s, 9H), 0.93 (d, J= 6.8 Hz, 3H), 0.91 (s, 9H), 0.88-0.90 (m, 6H), 0.08-0.13 (m, 12H).
Example 12 Preparation of aldehyde 4' from alcohol 18
Figure imgf000158_0001
A stirred solution of alcohol 18 prepared in Example 11 above (10 mg, 17.24 μmol) in CH2C12 (1.5 ml) at RT was treated with BAIB (7.77 mg, 24.14 μmol) and TEMPO (0.27 mg, 1.72 μmol). After 18 h, the volatiles were removed in vacuo and the crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (SiO2, PE/EtOAc 10:1) to yield aldehyde 4' (9.8 mg, 97 %) as colourless oil. Rf 0.66 (PE/EtOAc, 4:1); [α]D 20 =-28.3 (c = 1.43 in CHC13); 1HNMR (CDC13, 500 MHz) δ 9.76 (d, J= 2.8 Hz, IH) 6.64 (app dtd, J= 16.9, 10.6, 0.9 Hz, IH), 6.10 (app td, J= 11.0, 0.7 Hz, IH), 5.41 (app t, J = 10.6 Hz, IH), 5.23 (dd, J= 16.8, 2.0 Hz, IH), 5.13 (d, J= 10.1 Hz, IH), 3.75 (dd, J= 7.9, 4.6 Hz, IH) 3.74 (dd, J = 7.9, 4.6 Hz, IH), 3.47 (app dt, J = 5.0, 2.5 Hz, IH), 2.84-2.76 (m, IH), 2.57-2.52 (m, IH), 2.23 (d, J= 2.3 Hz, IH), 13C NMR (CDC13, 125 MHz) δ 205.1, 135.3, 132.3, 130.0, 117.8, 78.0, 77.4, 76.4, 50.1, 41.2, 37.8, 36.1, 35.0, 31.9, 30.5, 26.0, 25.9, 20.4, 18.3, 18.1, 17.7, 15.1, 12.3, 7.0, -3.83, -3.78, -4.2, - 4.4; IR v 2952, 2929, 2857, 1725 cm'1; HRMS calculated for C33H66O4Si2 [M+Na]: 605.4397. Found: 605.4395. Example 13 Preparation of bis-silyl ether 32 from alcohol 19
TBSO.^/^^X^- ^ TBSO
0H TBSO
19 32
TBSOTf (3.69 ml, 16.07 mmol) was added to a cooled (-78 °C) solution of alcohol 19
(2.8 g, 11.48 mmol) (prepared as described in reference 19) and 2,6-lutidine (4.00 ml,
34.43 mmol) in CH2C12 (100 ml). After 30 min at -78 °C, the reaction was quenched with saturated NH4CI solution (100 mL). The aqueous was extracted with CH2C12 (3 x
100 ml). The combined organic layers were dried (MgSO4) and the volatiles were removed in vacuo. The residue was purified by flash column chromatography (SiO2,
PE/EtOAc, 30:1) to yield bw-TBS-ether 32 (3.66 mg, 89%) as a colourless oil. Rf 0.74
(PE/EtOAc, 9:1); [α]D 20 =-9.8 (c 1.11, CHC13); 1H NMR (CDC13, 500 MHz) δ 5.81-
5.74 (m, IH), 5.06-5.01 (m, IH), 4.99-4.97 (m, IH), 3.76 (ddd, J = 6.9, 5.4, 3.8 Hz,
IH), 3.69-3.59 (m, 2H), 2.31 (qndt, J= 6.9, 3.8, 1.3 Hz, IH), 1.60-1.56 (m, 2H), 1.01
(d, J = 6.9 Hz, 3H), 0.894 (s, 9H), 0.889 (s, 9H), 0.052 (s, 6H), 0.036 (s, 6H); 13C
NMR (CDC13, 125 MHz) δ 140.9, 114.4, 72.3, 60.2, 43.3, 36.3, 25.94, 25.91, 18.27,
18.13, 14.7, -4.48, -4.51, -5.29.
Example 14 Preparation of aldehyde 33 from bis-silyl ether 32
Figure imgf000159_0001
Ozone was bubbled through a cooled (-78 °C) solution of bis-silyl ether 32 prepared in Example 13 above (2.47 g, 6.89 mmol) in CH2C12 (150 ml) until the reaction mixture turned dark blue. The ozone stream was replaced by a stream of oxygen until the solution was clear. Triphenylphosphine (1.98 g, 7.57 mmol) was added at -78 °C and the reaction mixture was allowed to warm to RT. After stirring for 4 h, silica gel was added to the reaction and the solvent was removed in vacuo. The on silica absorbed crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (SiO2, PE/EtOAc 30:1) to yield aldehyde 33 as a slight yellow oil which was contaminated with a little triphenylphosphine. Rf 0.47 (PE/EtOAc, 9:1); 1H NMR (CDC13, 500 MHz) δ 9.74(d, J= 1.9 Hz, IH), 4.19-4.13 (m, IH), 3.72-3.67 (m, 2H), 2.59-2.53 (m, IH), 1.81-1.63 (m, 2H), 1.12 (d, J= 6.9 Hz, 3H), 0.89 (s, 9H), 0.88 (s, 9H), 0.082 (s, 3H), 0.068 (s, 3H). 0.045 (s, 3H), 0.041 (s, 3H).
Example 15 Preparation of vinyl iodide 21 from aldehyde 33
Figure imgf000160_0001
A stirred suspension of chromium (II) chloride (5.92 g, 48.20 mmol) in dioxane/THF (40 ml, 1:1) at 0 °C was treated with a solution of aldehyde 33 prepared in Example 14 above (2.48 g, 6.89 mmol) in dioxane/THF (15 ml, 1:1). After 5 min at 0 °C, iodoform (9.49 g, 24.10 mmol) was added to the reaction mixture. After 18 h at 0 °C, the reaction was quenched with water (50 ml) and EtOAc (50 ml). The aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc (4 x 50 ml). The combined organics were dried (MgSO4) and the volatiles were removed in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (SiO2, PE/EtOAc 1:0→20:1) to yield 21 as a colourless oil (2.67 g, 78 % over 2 steps). Rf 0.70 (PE/Et2O, 10:1); [ ]D 20 = +6.4 (c 1.05, CHC13); 1H NMR (CDC13, 500 MHz) δ 6.48 (dd, J= 14.5, 8.2 Hz, IH), 6.00 (d, J= 15.1 Hz, IH), 3.75-3.71 (m, IH), 3.67-3.59 (m, 2H), 2.38-2.31 (m, IH), 1.62-1.57 (m, 2H), 1.02 (d, J= 6.9 Hz, 3H), 0.89 (s, 18H), 0.05 (s, 3H), 0.047 (s, 3H), 0.041 (s, 6H); 13C NMR (CDCI3, 125 MHz) δ 148.7, 75.0, 71.9, 59.7, 46.0, 37.0, 25.93, 25.89, 18.3, 18.1, 15.1, -4.46, -4.50, -5.30, -5.32; IR v 2955, 2929, 2857, 1603 cm"1; HRMS calcd for C19H41IO2Si2 [M+H]: 485.1763. Found: 485.1766.
Example 16 Preparation of alcohol 34 from vinyl iodide 21
Figure imgf000161_0001
21 34
To a stirred solution of vinyl iodide 21 prepared in Example 15 above (2.62 g, 5.41 mmol) in THF (60 ml) at RT was added a premixed solution of TBAF (IM in THF, 10.8 ml) and acetic acid (1.08 ml). After 18 h, the reaction was quenched with saturated NaHCO3 solution (60 ml). The aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc (3 x 60 ml). The combined organic layers were dried (MgSO4) and the volatiles were removed in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (SiO2, PE/EtOAc 9:1) to yield alcohol 34 (1.66 g, 83 %) as a colourless oil. Rf 0.17 (PE/EtOAc, 9:1); [α]D 20 = +8.0 (c 1.18, CHC13); 1H NMR (CDCI3, 500 MHz) δ 6.46 (dd, J= 14.5, 8.2 Hz, IH), 6.04 (dd, J= 14.5, 1.0 Hz, IH), 3.77 (app q, J= 5.4 Hz, IH), 3.76-3.68 (m, IH), 2.44-2.37 (m, IH), 1.69 (app q, J= 6.3 Hz, IH), 1.02 (d, J= 6.9 Hz, 3H), 0.90 (s, 18H), 0.09 (s, 3H), 0.08 (s, 3H); 13C NMR (CDC13, 125 MHz) δ 148.5, 75.5, 73.4, 59.9, 45.9, 35.4, 25.8, 18.0, 14.5, -4.4, -4.5; TR v3339, 2954, 2 929, 2857, 1603 cm-1; HRMS calcd for C13H27IO2Si Pvf+NJLJ: 388.1163. Found: 388.1165. Example 17 Preparation of aldehyde 35 from alcohol 34
Figure imgf000162_0001
A solution of alcohol 34 prepared in Example 16 above (1.65, 4.46 mmol) and pyridine (1.08 ιrj;~13.37 rhmcLT in CH2CI2 (20 ml) at RT was treated with Dess Martin periodinane (2.82 g, 6.68 mmol). After 2 h, the reaction was quenched with saturated NaHCO3 (10 ml) and Na2S2O3 solution (10 ml, 20 %, aq.). The aqueous layer was extracted with CH2C12 (3 x 20 ml). The combined organic layers were dried (MgSO4) and the volatiles were removed in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (SiO2, PE/EtOAc 20:1) to yield aldehyde 35 (1.49 g, 91 %) as a colourless oil. Rf 0.42 (PE/EtOAc, 9:1); [α]D 20 = +15.8 (c 1.02, CHC13); !H NMR (CDCI3. 500 MHz) δ 9.79-9.77 (m, IH) 6.46 (dd, J= 14.6, 8.4 Hz, IH), 6.07 (dd, J= 14.5, 1.3 Hz, IH), 4.14-4.10 (m, IH), 2.55 (dd, J= 6.3, 2.5 Hz, IH), 2.50 (dd, J= 5.4, 1.9 Hz, IH), 2.41-2.34 (m, IH), 1.04 (d, J= 6.9 Hz, 3H), 0.88 (s, 9H), 0.08 (s, 3H), 0.05 (s, 3H); 13C NMR (CDC13, 125 MHz) δ 201.3, 147.4, 70.4, 48.4, 46.6, 25.8, 18.0, 15.0, -4.6 ; IR v 2955, 2929, 2857, 1725, 1602 cm ; HRMS calcd for C13H25IO2Si [M+NH4]: 386.1011. Found: 386.1007.
Example 18 Preparation of acid 22 from aldehyde 35
Figure imgf000162_0002
A stirred solution of aldehyde 35 prepared in Example 17 above (1.47g, 3.99 mmol) in te/ -butanol (15 ml) and 2-methyl-2-butene (1.5 ml) was treated with a mixture of NaClO2 (1.44 g, 15.96 mmol) and Na2H2PO4 (2.49 g, 15.96 mmol) in water (6 ml). The reaction mixture was stirred for 2 h at RT, thinned by the addition of brine (15 ml) and EtOAc (15 ml) and extracted with CH2C12 (3 x 20 ml). The combined organic layers were dried (MgSO4) and the volatiles were removed in vacuo. to yield acid 22 (1.40 g, 92 %) as a colourless oil. Rf 0.31 (PE/EtOAc, 9:1); [α]D 20 = +10.0 (c 1.22, CHC13); 1H NMR (CDC13, 500 MHz) δ 6.47 (dd, J= 14.5, 8.2 Hz, IH), 6.10 (dd, J =
14.5, 1.3 Hz, IH), 4.08-4.03 (m, IH), 2.46 (d, J = 6.0 Hz, 2H), 2.44-2.37 (m, IH), 1.04 (d, J= 6.9 Hz, 3H), 0.89 (s, 9H), 0.09 (s, 3H), 0.06 (s, 3H); 13C NMR (CDC13, 125 MHz) δ 176.6, 147.3, 76.5, 71.7, 46.2, 39.4, 25.8, 18.0, 15.0, -4.67, -4.70; IR v 2955, 2929, 2857, 1709, 1603 cm 1; HRMS calcd for C13H25IO3Si [M+H]: 385.0690. Found: 385.0693.
Example 19 Preparation of β-ketophosphonate 3' from acid 22
Figure imgf000163_0001
A stirred solution of acid 22 prepared in Example 18 above (0.8 g, 2.08 mmol) in
CH2C12 (6 ml) at RT was treated with l-cMoro-N V"-frimethylpropenylamine (551 μl,
4.16 mmol). After 1 h, the volatiles were removed in vacuo under inert gas and the yellow residue was dried for 2 h under high vacum. A stirred solution of bis (2,2,2- trifluoroethyl) methylphosphonate in THF (10 ml) at -100 °C was treated with a IM solution of LiHMDS (6.25 mL, 6.25 mmol) in THF. After 10 min, a solution of the previously prepared mixed anhydride in THF (2 ml) was added via cannula to the reaction. After 2 h, the reaction was quenched with saturated ΝH4CI (20 ml). The aqueous layer was extracted with Et2O (3 x 20 ml). The combined organic layers were washed with brine (6 ml), dried (MgSO4) and the volatiles were removed in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (SiO2, PE/EtOAc 9:1 → 5:1) to yield ketone 3' as a colourless oil (711.0 mg, 55 %). Rf 0.60
(PE EtOAc, 3:2); [α]D 20 = 8.3 (c = 1.07 in CHC13); 1H NMR (CDC13, 500 MHz) δ
6.44 (dd, J = 14.5, 8.2 Hz, IH), 6.07 (dd, J = 14.6, 0.9 Hz, IH), 4.49-4.40 (m, 4H) 4.10 (ddd, IH, J = 6.2, 5.3, 3.9 Hz), 3.29 (dd, J= 21.6, 15.4 Hz, IH), 3.25 (dd, J = 22.0, 15.5 Hz, IH), 2.69 (dd, J = 16.7, 6.5 Hz, 2H), 2.60 (dd, J = 16.9, 5.2 Hz, 2H),2.34 (app. qnd, IH, J= 7.1, 3.9 Hz), 1.03 (d, J= 6.9 Hz, 3H), 0.87 (s, 9H), 0.08 (s, 3H), 0.02 (s, 3H), 13C NMR (CDC13, 125 MHz) δ 199.6 (d, J = 7.0 Hz), 147.3, 122.4 (qdd, J= 219.4, 8.8, 3.2 Hz), 76.4, 62.4 (qdd, J= 53.7, 15.6, 5.4 Hz), 48.8 (d, J
= 4.8 Hz), 46.1, 43.2, 42.1, 18.0, 14.8, 14.0. -4.70, 4.77; IR v 2954, 2932, 2856, 1721
cm ; HRMS calcd for C18H30IPO5Si [M+Na]: 649.0447. Found: 649.0440.
Example 20 Preparation of vinyl iodide 23 from β-ketophosphonate 3' and aldehyde 4'
Figure imgf000164_0001
A suspension of 18-crown-6 (169 mg, 0.64 mmol) and freshly ground, dry K2CO3 (74 mg, 0.53 mmol) in toluene (1 ml) was stirred for 2 h until the mixture turned clear. The reaction was cooled to -30 °C and treated with a solution of phosphonate 3' prepared in Example 19 above (50 mg, 79.75 μmol) and aldehyde 4' prepared in Example 12 above (31 mg, 53.17 μmol) in toluene (0.5 ml). After 2 h at RT the reaction was quenched with saturated NH CI (3 ml). The aqueous layer was extracted with CH2C12 (3 4 ml). The combined organic layers were dried (MgSO4) and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (SiO2, PE/EtOAc 30:1) to yield vinyl iodide 23 as a colourless oil (31 mg, 47 %, Z:E 4:1). Rf 0.46 (PE/EtOAc, 9:1); [α]D 20 = 21.5 (c 1.52, CHC13); 1H NMR (CDC13, 500 MHz) δ 6.63 (dtd, J= 16.8, 10.6, 0.8 Hz, IH), 6.49 (dd, J= 14.5, 8.6 Hz, IH), 6.31 (dd, J= 11.6, 9.8 Hz, IH), 6.09 (t, J= 11.0 Hz, IH), 6.03 (d, J = 11.7 Hz, IH), 6.00 (dd, J= 14.5, 1.0 Hz, IH), 5.41 (t, J= 10.2 Hz, IH), 5.21 (dd, J= 16.9, 1.9 Hz, IH), 5.12 (d, J= 10.1 Hz, IH), 4.14 (td, J= 6.0, 3.5 Hz, IH), 3.76-3.73 (m, IH), 3.72-3.65 (m, IH), 3.49-3.45 (m, 2H), 2.84 -2.76 (m, IH), 2.55 (s, IH) 2.54 (d, J = 0.6 Hz, IH), 2.36-2.29 (m, IH), 2.32 (d J= 2.1 Hz, IH), 1.73-1.67 (m, IH), 1.65-1.59 (m, 2H), 1.41-1.33 (m, 2H), 1.30-1.21 (m, 2H), 1.03 (d, J = 6.9 Hz, 3H), 1.00 (d, J= 6.9 Hz, 3H), 0.95 (d, J= 6.8 Hz, 3H), 0.91 (s, 9H), 0.91-0.90 9(m, IH), 0.90 (d, J= 6.5 Hz, 3H), 0.89 (s, 9H), 0.88-0.86 (m, IH), 0.87 (s, 9H), 0.83 (d, J= 6.2 Hz, 3H), 0.82 (d, J= 6.8 Hz, 3H), 0.083 (s, 3H), 0.079 (s, 3H), 0.076 (s, 3H), 0.069 (s, 3H), 0.054 (s, 3H), 0.013 (s, 3H); 13C NMR (CDC13, 125 MHz) δ 199.3, 152.4, 147.9, 135.4, 132.3, 129.9, 125.3, 117.7, 79.7, 77.7, 75.7, 71.1, 49.4, 46.3, 41.1, 37.6, 36.4, 36.1, 35.8, 32.1, 31.3, 30.6, 26.2, 25.94, 25.88, 20.5, 19.0, 18.4, 18.1, 18.0, 17.7, 15.9, 15.7, 6.8, -3.65, -3.72, -3.91, -4.36, -4.40, 4.80; HRMS calculated for C47H91IO5Si3 [M+Na]: 969.5117. Found: 969.5101. IR v 2955, 2928, 2856, 1689, 1611 cm-1; HRMS calcd for C47H91IO5Si3 [M+Na]: 969.5117. Found: 969.5101.
Example 21 Preparation of seco acid 26 from vinyl iodide 23
Figure imgf000165_0001
A solution of vinyl iodide 23 prepared in Example 20 above (30.0 mg, 0.031 mmol)
and stannane 5 (65.5 mg, 0.127 mmol) in 750 μL of deoxygenated NMP was treated
with copper I thiophenecarboxylate (61.0 mg, 0.316 mmol). After 18 h, the reaction was quenched with saturated NH CI, the aqueous layer was extracted with CH2C12 (2x). The combined organics were dried (MgSO4), filtered and the volatiles were removed in vacuo. A solution of crude TIPS ester in 5 mL THF/MeOH (4:1) was treated with KF (37 mg, 0.637 mmol). After 30 min, the reaction was quenched with saturated NH4CI. The aqueous layer was extracted with CH2C12 (3x). The combined organics were dried (MgSO4), filtered and the volatiles were removed in vacuo. The residue was purified by flash chromatography (SiO2, hexanes/Et2O, 1:1) to provide seco-acid 26 (23.5 mg, 83%) as a colorless oil. [ ]D 20 = +8.7 (c 6.7, CHC13); 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDC13) δ 7.31 (dd, IH, J = 11.2, 15.4 Hz), 6.65 (dd, IH, J = 11.2, 11.2 Hz), 6.63 (ddd, IH, J= 10.5, 10.5, 17.0 Hz), 6.29 (dd, IH, J= 9.9, 11.5 Hz), 6.09 (m, 1), 6.09 (dd, IH, J= 10.4, 10.5 Hz), 6.03 (d, IH, J= 11.5 Hz), 5.61 (d, IH, J= 11.2 Hz), 5.42 (dd, IH, J= 10.4, 10.4 Hz), 5.21 (dd, IH, J= 1.6, 17.0 Hz), 5.12 (d, IH, J= 10.5 Hz), 4.25 (ddd, IH, J = 3.4, 5.6, 6.2 Hz), 3.74 (m, IH), 3.69 (m, IH), 3.48 (m, IH), 3.46 (m, IH), 2.80 (m, IH), 2.55 (dd, IH, J= 6.2, 16.4 Hz), 2.50 (dd, IH, J = 5.6, 16.4 Hz), 1.69 (m, IH), 1.58-1.68 (m, 2H), 1.20-1.42 (m, 6H), 1.09 (d, 3H, J = 6.8 Hz), 1.00 (d, 3H, J= 7.0 Hz), 0.95 (d, 3H, J= 6.9 Hz), 0.91 (s, 9H), 0.90 (d, 3H, J = 7.1 Hz), 0.89 (s, 9H), 0.87 (s, 9H), 0.86 (m, IH), 0.82 (d, 3H, J= 6.9 Hz), 0.82 (d, 3H, J = 6.8 Hz), 0.09 (s, 3H), 0.08 (s, 3H), 0.08 (s, 3H), 0.07 (s, 3H), 0.05 (s, 3H), 0.01 (s, 3H); 13C NMR (125 MHz, CDC13) δ 199.3, 170.6, 152.3, 147.6, 147.3, 135.4, 132.3, 130.0, 127.4, 125.4, 117.7, 115.1, 79.7, 77.6, 76.7, 71.5, 49.5, 43.2, 41.1, 37.6, 36.4, 36.1, 35.8, 32.1, 31.3, 30.5, 26.2, 25.9, 25.9, 20.5, 19.0, 18.4, 18.1, 18.1, 17.7, 16.0, 15.7, 6.8, -3.7, -3.7, -3.9, -4.3, -4.4, -4.8; IR (neat) v 2957, 2857, 1691, 1601, 1462, 1253, 1082 cm"1; HRMS (+ESI) calcd. for C5oH9 O7Si3 [M+Na]: 913.6205. Found: 913.6221. Example 22 Preparation of macrocycle 2' from seco acid 26
Figure imgf000167_0001
A solution of seco acid 26 prepared in Example 21 above (13.0 mg, 0.015 mmol) and NEt3 (15 μL, 0.105 mmol) was successively treated with 2,4,6- trichlorobenzoylchloride (12 μL, 0.075 mmol) and a solution of DMAP (4.6 mg, 0.037 mmol) in 4 mL toluene. After 30 min at 50 °C, DMAP (4.6 mg, 0.037 mmol) was added to the reaction mixture. After 30 min, the reaction was quenched with saturated NaHCO3. The aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc (3x). The combined organics were dried (NaSO4), filtered and the volatiles were removed in vacuo. The residue was purified by flash chromatography (SiO2, Pet ether/Et2O, 30:1) to provide macrolactone 2 (10.0 mg, 77%) as a colorless oil and recovered seco-acid 26 (1.0 mg, 8%). [α]D 20 = -11.2 (c 1.7, CHC13); 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDC13) δ 7.14 (dd, IH, J = 11.0, 15.6 Hz), 6.58 (ddd, IH, J= 10.7, 10.7, 16.5 Hz), 6.54 (dd, IH, J= 11.3, 11.3 Hz), 6.36 (dd, IH, J = 10.3, 11.8 Hz), 6.09 (d, IH, J = 11.9 Hz), 6.04 (dd, IH, J = 12.3, 12.3 Hz), 6.01 (dd, IH, J= 8.1, 15.2 Hz), 5.58 (d, IH, J= 11.6 Hz), 5.45 (dd, IH, J= 10.4, 10.4 Hz), 5.22 (dd, IH, J= 4.1, 7.9 Hz), 5.21 (d, IH, J= 16.8 Hz), 5.15 (d, IH, J 10.4 Hz), 4.11 (m, IH), 3.67 (m, IH), 3.63 (m, IH), 3.33 (dd, IH, J= 1.7, 5.4 Hz), 3.07 (m, IH), 2.59 (dd, IH, J= 6.3, 13.9 Hz), 2.53 (dd, IH, J= 5.6, 13.9 Hz), 2.40 (m, IH), 1.73 (m, IH), 1.39-1.53 (m, 3H), 1.05-1.28 (m, 3H), 1.11 (d, 3H, J = 6.9 Hz), 1.04 (d, 3H, J= 7.0 Hz), 1.00 (d, 3H, J= 6.89 Hz), 0.94 (s, 9H), 0.92 (s, 9H), 0.89 (s, 9H), 0.83 (d, 3H, J= 7.0 Hz), 0.78 (d, 3H, J= 7.1 Hz), 0.78 (d, 3H, J= 6.8 Hz), 0.68 (m, IH); 13C NMR (125 MHz, CDC13) δ 199.1, 166.5, 150.9, 144.6, 142.9, 133.2, 131.7, 129.8, 128.1, 125.4, 118.2, 117.9, 80.6, 77.6, 76.7, 72.7, 51.8, 44.1, 42.3, 39.2, 37.5, 35.8, 33.8, 31.2, 30.2, 29.7, 26.2, 26.1," 25.8, 20.5, 18.7, 18.5, 18.1, 18.1, 18.0, 15.7, 14.1, 9.2, -3.5, -3.6, -4.2, -4.5, -4.7, -4.9; IR (neat) v 2956, 2857, 1707, 1472, 1255, 1026 cm"1; HRMS (+ESI) calcd for C5oH92O6Si3 [M+Na]: 895.6099. Found: 895.6071.
Example 23 Preparation of tris-TBS-dictyostatin 27 from macrocycle 2'
Figure imgf000168_0001
A premixed solution of macrocycle 2' prepared in Example 22 above (2.6 mg, 2.97 μmol) and CeCl3-7H2O (22.2 mg, 59.5 μmol) in 1 mL EtOH at -78 °C was treated with NaBHj (2.25 mg, 59.5 μmol) and then warmed to -30 °C. After 30 min, the reaction was quenched with pH 7 buffer. The aqueous layer was extracted with CH2C12 (3x). The combined organics were dried (MgSO4), filtered and the volatiles were removed in vacuo. The residue was purified by flash chromatography (SiO2, Pet. Ether/EtOAc, 15:1) to provide trz',s-TBS-dictyostatin 27 (1.9 mg, 73 %) as a colorless oil. [α]D 20 = + 17.1 (c 0.31, CHC13); 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDC13) δ 7.07 (dd, IH, J= 11.2, 12.0 Hz), 6.57 (ddd, IH, J= 10.5, 10.5, 16.4 Hz), 6.52 (dd, IH, J= 10.9, 10.9 Hz), 5.98-6.08 (m, 2H), 5.64 (dd, IH, J= 9.6, 9.6 Hz), 5.58 (d, IH, J= 11.4 Hz), 5.37 (m, 2H), 5.20 (d, IH, J= 16.4 Hz), 5.10 (m, 2H), 4.58 (m, IH), 4.08 (m, IH), 3.55 (m, IH), 3.24 (m, IH), 3.02 (m, IH), 2.66 (m, IH), 2.57 (m, IH), 1.83 (m, IH), 1.20-1.60 (m, 7H), 1.09 (m, IH), 1.07 (d, 3H, J= 7.0 Hz), 1.02 (d, 3H, J= 6.6 Hz), 0.97 (d, 3H, J = 6.9 Hz), 0.96 (d, 3H, J = 6.8 Hz), 0.93 (s, 9H), 0.93 (s, 9H), 0.90 (s, 9H), 0.79 (d, 3H, / = 6.9 Hz), 0.78 (d, 3H, J = 7.1 Hz), 1.00 (m, IH), 0.62 (m, IH), 0.14 (s, 3H), 0.12 (s, 3H), 0.07 (s, 3H), 0.06 (s, 3H), 0.05 (s, 3H), 0.04 (s, 3H); 13C NMR (125
MHz, CDC13) δ 166.3, 143.4, 142.2, 132.4, 131.8, 130.9, 129.7, 128.8, 127.7, 118.1,
118.0, 80.3, 76.7-77.2 (3C), 70.0, 53.4, 42.7, 41.5, 39.3, 35.5, 34.9, 34.6, 31.8, 30.3, 28.9, 26.2, 25.9, 25".8, 20.3, 19.8, 18.3, 18.1, 18.0, 15.9, 14.0, 12.1, 10.1, -3.5, -3.6, -
3.9, -4.2, -4.4, -4.8; IR (neat) v 2955, 2858, 1715, 1462, 1379, 1255, 1074 cm"1;
HRMS (+ESI) calcd. for C50H94O6Si3 [M+Na]: 897.6256. Found: 897.6205.
Example 24 Preparation of Dictyostatin
Figure imgf000169_0001
(if)
To a stirred solution of the tris-TBS-ether 27 obtained in Example 23 above (3 mg, 3.43 μmol, 1 eq) in MeOH (0.5 ml) at 0 9C was added acidified MeOH (3:1 MeOH onc.HCl). After stirring for 5 h at r.t. the reaction mixture was thinned with water (3 ml) and EtOAc (3 ml). The phases were separated and the aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc (3 x 3 ml). The combined organic layers were dried (MgSO4) and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (PE/EtOAc 2:1 → 1;1 -→2:1) to yield dictyostatin of formula (If) as a white solid (1.4 mg, 2.63 mmol, 76 %).
Rf 0.43 (EtOAc); [α]D 20 = -32.7 (c = 0.22 in CHC13); 1H NMR (CDC13, 500 MHz) δ 7.21 (dd, J = 15.5, 11.4 Hz, IH), 6.70 (ddd, /= 15.2, 10.4, 10.4 Hz, IH), 6.65 (dd, / = 11.4, 11.4 Hz, IH), 6.18 (dd, / = 15.5, 6.7 Hz, IH), 6.06 (dd, 7 = 11.1, 11.1 Hz, IH), 5.55 (d, J = 11.4 Hz, IH), 5.55 (dd, J= 10.0, 10.0 Hz), 5.41 (dd, J = 10.8, 8.9 Hz, IH), 5.33 (dd, J= 11.1, 10.6 Hz, IH), 5.24 (dd, J= 15.2, 1.7 Hz, IH), 5.14 (dd, J = 10.4, 1.7 Hz, _H), 5.13 (dd,_J= 6.9, 5.1 Hz, IH), 4.65 (dddd, J= 10.1, 9.5, 2.9, 0.8 Hz, IH), 4.05 (ddd, J= 10.6, 4.0, 2.7 Hz, IH), 3.34 (m, IH), 3.16 (ddq, J= 10.6, 6.9, 6.8 Hz, IH), 3.10 (dd, J= 8.1, 2.9 Hz, IH), 2.76 (m, IH), 2.60 (m, IH), 1.88 ( , IH), 1.83 (m, IH), 1.59 (m, IH), 1.57 (m, IH), 1.53 (m, IH), 1.49 (ddd, J= 14.0, 10.6, 2.9 Hz, IH), 1.42 (ddd, J= 14.0, 10.1, 2.7 Hz, IH), 1.24 (ddd, J= 13.8, 10.3, 3.8 Hz, IH), 1.15 (d, J= 6.9 Hz, 3H), 1.13 (d, J= 7.0 Hz, 3H), 1.10 (m, IH), 1.07 (d, J= 6.9 Hz, 3H), 1.01 (d, J= 6.8 Hz, 3H), 0.95 (d, J= 6.5 Hz, 3H), 0.93 (d, J= 6.6 Hz, 3H), 0.89 (m, IH), 0.69 (m, IH); 13C NMR (CDC13, 125 MHz) δ 168.0, 146.3, 144.8, 134.9, 134.5, 133.4, 131.3, 131.1, 128.5, 118.5, 118.0, 80.3, 73.7, 70.3, 65.4, 44.0, 35.8, 35.7, 35.3, 31.2, 21.8, 19.3, 18.0, 16.0, 10.3; HRMS calculated for C32H52O6 [M+Na]: 555.3662. Found: 555.3663.
High performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) was performed on the dictyostatin prepared above and observed at 225 nm, 256 nm and 263 nm, using an analytical 305 pump from Gilson, a 305 UN/VIS detector and a 806 manometric module using a CHIRACEL OD (4.6 x 250 mm) column. A filtered solvent mixture of hexane with 20 % isopropanol was used at a flow rate of 1.0 ml per min. The HPLC traces shown in Figures 10 to 12 indicates a purity of higher than 99% for the synthetic dictyostatin.
The 1H and 13C nmr spectra are shown in Figures 13 and 14 and also indicate a purity of higher than 99%.
Example 25 Stereochemical assignment of the structure of dictyostatin
The planar structure 1 (Figure 1) of dictyostatin, featuring a 22-membered macrolactone ring with five alkenes (2Z,4E,10Z,23Z) and a characteristic sequence of methyl and hydroxyl-bearing stereocentres, was determined from spectroscopic data (1H and 13C ΝMR, COSY and HMQC) obtained for a Corallistidae derived sample (1 mg).
Optimum 1H signal dispersion was realised in CD3OD at the highest available field strength (700 and 800 MHz). The 3JH,H coupling constants were extracted from a combination of 2D J-resolved spectra and homonuclear decoupling experiments, while measurement of heteronuclear coupling constants (2'3Jc,H) relied on analysis of HSQC-HECADE spectra (Νanz, D. and W. Kozminski, J. Magn (2000) Reson. 142:294 and Marquez, B., W. H. Gerwick and R. T. Williamson (2001) Magn. Reson. Chem. 39:499). A series of ID and 2D NOESY experiments proved invaluable in defining relationships between the three isolated stereoclusters indicated in 1. Notably, the coupling constants and NOESY correlations suggested the C-2 to C-16 region is relatively rigid, while at least two rapidly interconverting conformations must be considered for the C- 17 to C-21 region.
As depicted in Figure 2, J-based configuration analysis indicated a 6,1-anti- 1,9-anti relationship within the C-5 to C-10 segment 2. The small coupling between H-6 and H-7 suggested a gauche relationship, while a large heteronuclear coupling from H-6 to C-7 and a relatively large coupling from H-7 to Me-6 supported an anti relationship between the adjacent methyl and hydroxyl substituents, confirmed by a number of strong NOESY correlations. The diastereotopic methylene protons at C-8 could be related to H-7 and H-9 through large dipolar couplings, H-8a to H-7 and H- 8b to H-9, and small couplings, H-8a to H-9 and H-8b to H-7. A large coupling, H-8a to C-7, and a small coupling, H-8a to C-9, established the relationship between H-8a and the two carbinol stereocentres. Couplings of similar magnitude were observed from H-8b to C-9 and H-8b to C-7, securing the 1,9-anti diol relationship.
The homo- and heteronuclear coupling constants observed for the C-l l to C- 16 subunit of dictyostatin 3 are listed in Figure 3. Assignment of an anti relationship between the adjacent methyl and hydroxyl substituents at C-12 and C-13 was determined by the small couplings observed from H- 12 to C-13, H- 12 to H- 13 and H- 13 to Me- 12. A large coupling between H-13 and H-14 suggested an antiperiplanar relationship between these protons, supported by small couplings from H-13 to C-15 and H-13 to Me-14. A series of NOESY correlations (H-12 and H-15a, H-13 and H- 15b, and H-13 and Me-14) confirmed the 13,14-syn relationship. Connectivity between the 1,3 -related methyl-bearing stereocentres at C-14 and C-16 relied on a confident assignment of the diastereotopic methylene protons at C-15. Large dipolar couplings, H-15ato H-16 and H-15b to H-14, and small couplings, H-15ato H-14 and H-15b to H-16, together with small heteronuclear couplings between both methylene protons and C-13 and Me- 16 supported the relative orientation depicted (14,16-syή). Analysis of the NOESY spectra revealed a series of correlations, H-14 to H-ll, H-l l to H-10 and H-10 to H-8b, indicating these protons are oriented on the same face of the macrolide ring. Additional correlations from H-15a to H-12, H-15b to H-13 and H-12 to H-9, in combination with the relative stereochemistry determined by J-based configuration analysis established the connectivity between the isolated C-6 to C-9 and C- 12 to C-16 stereoclusters.
As depicted in Figure 4, both the homo- and heteronuclear couplings observed for the C-17 to C-21 segment of dictyostatin suggested the contribution of two or more rapidly interconverting conformations. In particular, medium couplings from H- 19 to H-18a, H-19 to H-20, H-19 to Me-20 and H-20 to H-21 supported a degree of conformational flexibility. Establishing a relationship between the substituents at C- 21 and C-22 relied on both J-based configuration analysis and relevant NOESY correlations. A relatively large homonuclear coupling between H-21 and H-22 and small couplings, H-21 to C-23 and H-21 to Me-22, supported an antiperiplanar relationship. Two key NOESY correlations, between H-20 and Me-22 and between H-23 and H-4, supported the relative assignment as depicted. Analysis of models representing potential C-19 and C-20 stereoisomers suggested this was most consistent with an ύl-syn relationship for the substituents at C-19, C-20 and C-21. The strong NOESY correlations from H-17b to H-20 and H-18a to H-21, along with the observed couplings in this region, were rationalised by the conformational reorganisation required to accommodate both the C-l/C-2 s-tι-ans and s-cis rotamers 4A and 4B indicated in Fig. 4. While the determination of the relationship between this isolated stereocluster and the C-l to C-16 segment was not possible through J- based configuration analysis, molecular modelling of the two possible stereochemical permutations favoured the assignment of structure (If) (Figure 5).
Using Macromodel (Version 7.2) Mohamadi, F., N. G. J. Richards, W. C. Guida, R. Kiskamp, M. Lipton, C. Caufield, G. Chang, T. Hendrickson and W. C. Still (1990) J Comput. Chem. 11:440), a 10,000 step Monte Carlo search was performed with the MM2* force field and the generalised Born/surface area (CB/SA) water solvent model (Still, W. C, A. Tempczyk, R. C. Hawley and T. Hendrickson (1990) J Am. Chem. Soc. 112:6127). For structure (If), a series of discrete families of low energy conformations were found, with only two conformers within 2.00 kcal/mol of the global minimum. The lowest energy conformation 4A, in which the lactone adopts a C-l/C-2 s-ti'ans arrangement, accounted for the observed NOESY correlations from H-17b to H-20, H-19 to H-22, and H-22 to H-25 (4B (accounting for the strong NOESY correlation from H-18a to H-21) was found 3.9 kcal/mol above the lowest energy conformation 4A). The energy difference seems too high for the ready exchange observed between the two conformations by NMR. However, for complex, polar molecules, the energetic profile obtained depends on the force field employed: N. Nevins, D. Cicero and J. P. Snyder (1990) J. Org. Chem. 64:3979)- Furthermore, examination of the calculated dihedral angles and correlation to a corresponding series of 3/H,H coupling constants, resulted in an acceptable match with the experimental NMR data. Finally, the remarkable homology between the relative stereochemistry, as assigned" by these studies, and that of the structurally related polyketide discodermolide (6) (ter Haar, E., R. J. Kowalski, E. Hamel, C. M. Lin, R. E. Longley, S. P. Gunasekera, H. S. Rosenkranz and B. W. Day (1996) Biochemistry 35:243) suggests the assignment of the full absolute configuration for dictyostatin, as shown in (If), based on a common biogenesis.
A comparison of the 1H and 13C nmr spectra for this naturally obtained dictyostatin 1 and that of the dictyostatin prepared in Examples 1 to 24 above confirm that the relative and absolute configuration of dictyostatin 1 is indeed as predicted above, i.e. (-)-dicfyostatin 1 has the formula (If).
Example 26 Effect of natural dictyostatin 1 and synthetic dictyostatin 1 on cell cycle progression of A549 human lung adenocarcinoma cells in comparison to paclitaxel
A549 human lung adenocarcinoma cells were used as cell cycle targets to compare the effects on perturbation of the cell cycle of synthetic dictyostatin 1 to that of natural dictyostatin 1 and the known mitotic spindle inhibitor paclitaxel. Cell cycle analyses were performed as follows: A549 human lung adenocarcinoma cells were incubated in tissue culture media (TCM = Roswell Park Memorial Institute (RPMI) medium 1640 supplemented with 100 U/ml penicillin, 100 mg/ml streptomycin, 60 mg/ml 1-glutamine, 18 mM HEPES, 0.05 mg/ml gentamicin and 10% fetal bovine serum) at 37°C in 5% CO2 in air in the presence or absence of varying concentrations of natural dictyostatin 1, synthetic dictyostatin 1 or paclitaxel for 24 hours.
Cells were harvested, fixed in ethanol and stained with 0.02 mg/ml of propidium iodide (P.I.) together with 0.1 mg/ml of RNAse A. This procedure permeabilizes cells and allows entry of P.I. to stain DNA (propidium iodide also stains double stranded RNA, so RNAse is included in the preparation to exclude this possibility). Stained preparations were analyzed on a Coulter EPICS ELITE with 488 nm excitation. Fluorescence measurements and resulting DNA histograms were collected from at least 3,000 P.I. stained cells at an emission wavelength of 690 nm. Raw histogram data was further analyzed using a cell cycle analysis program (Multicycle, Phoenix Flow Systems).
The results of these experiments are shown in Table 1 below. Non-treated control A549 cells exhibited a typical pattern of cell cycling, with a large percentage (51%) of the cell population comprising the Gi population (first peak) with lesser percentages comprising both the S (12%) and G2/M (23 %) phases of the cell cycle. A549 cells treated with 100 nM paclitaxel exhibited decreased percentages of cells comprising the Gi population (8%) and corresponding increased percentages in both S (8%) and G2/M (77%) phases of the cell cycle indicating paclitaxel' s ability to induce G2/M block. A549 cells treated with 100 nM natural dictyostatin 1 exhibited decreased percentages of cells comprising the G1 population (19%) and corresponding increased percentages in both S (12%) and G2/M (60%) phases of the cell cycle indicating natural dictyostatin' s ability to induce G2/M block. A549 cells treated with 100 nM synthetic dictyostatin 1 exhibited decreased percentages of cells comprising the Gi population (16%) and corresponding increased percentages in both S (12%) and G2/M (62%) phases of the cell cycle indicating synthetic dictyostatin' s ability to induce G2/M block. The effect on the cell cycle of natural and synthetic dictyostatin 1 is indistinguishable in this analysis.
Table 1. Effect on Cell Cycle Progression of A549 Human Lung Adenocarcinoma Cells of natural and synthetic dictyostatin- 1 in Comparison to Paclitaxel
Figure imgf000174_0001
Example 27 Immunofluorescent detection of effects on the microtubule matrix in tumor cells
Natural and synthetic, dictyostatin 1 were evaluated as to their effects on the microtubule network of cells using anti-alpha-tubulin monoclonal antibodies in order to compare their effects with those of the mitotic spindle inhibitor paclitaxel. Cells treated with the anti-cancer drug paclitaxel routinely exhibit abnormal formation of multiple centriolar-radiating microtubules with extensive clusters of associated microtubular "bundles", unlike the fine "mesh" of individual microtubules which make up the cytoskeletal network.
A549 human lung adenocarcinoma cells were maintained in tissue culture media [TCM = Roswell Park Memorial Institute (RPMI) medium 1640 supplemented with 100 U/ml penicillin, 100 mg/ml streptomycin, 60 mg/ml 1-glutamine, 18 mM HEPES, 0.05 mg/ml gentamicin and 10% fetal bovine serum] and cultured in plastic culture flasks at 37°C in humidified air containing 5% CO2. Stock cultures of A549 cells were subcultured 1:10 every 3 to 4 days. On day 1, 1.25 x IO5- A549 cells were sub-cultured in TCM overnight at 37°C in 5% CO2 on 22 mm2 coverslips in 6-well microtiter plates. On day 2, TCM was removed and replaced with various concentrations of natural dictyostatin 1, synthetic dictyostatin 1 or paclitaxel, in TCM or TCM without drug (control) and incubated overnight at 37°C in 5% CO2. On day 3, TCM was removed and cells attached to coverslips were fixed with a 3.7% formaldehyde solution in Dulbecco's PBS for 10 minutes at room temperature. Cells were permeabilized with a 2% Triton X-100 solution, 2 ml per well, for 5 minutes at room temperature and washed twice in Dulbecco's PBS prior to staining.
To each well containing cells attached to coverslips a 2 ml volume of mouse monoclonal anti-alpha-tubulin (Cat # T-5168, Sigma Chemical Co.) diluted 1:1000 in Dulbecco's phosphate buffered saline (D-PBS) was added and the cells incubated at room temperature for 45 minutes. A 2 ml volume of goat-anti-mouse-IgG-FITC conjugate (Cat # T-5262, Sigma Chemical Co.) diluted 1:1000 in D-PBS was added and the cells incubated at room temperature for 45 minutes. Coverslips were rinsed three times with sterile distilled water, air-dried and mounted on slides and observed under the microscope using epifluorescence illumination for the presence of abnormal aster and microtubule formation. The results of these experiments are shown in Figures 15A, 15B, 15C and 15D. Figure 15 A shows a non-treated control A549 cell preparation with characteristic staining of individual microtubules with fluorescent anti-alpha-tubulin indicated by a fine'network "mesh" of microtubular material. Nuclei are uniform and rounded as indicated by red staining with propidium iodide. Figure 15B shows correspondιng~A549 cells treated with 100 nM Paclitaxel and exhibits a characteristic formation of microtubular "bundles" but also a substantial amount of "non-bundled" microtubular material still remained in the cytoplasm. Figure 15C shows corresponding A549 cells treated with 100 nM natural dictyostatin 1 and exhibiting extensive microtubule bundling resulting in almost complete depletion of non- bundled microtubular material in the cytoplasm. Figure 15D shows corresponding A549 cells treated with 100 nM synthetic dictyostatin 1 and also exhibits extensive microtubule bundling resulting in almost complete depletion of non-bundled microtubular material in the cytoplasm. The results observed for natural and synthetic dictyostatin 1 are indistinguishable in this assay..
Example 28 Cytotoxic effects of dictyostatin 1 on tumor cell lines
Natural dictyostatin 1 and synthetic dictyostatin 1 were analyzed as to their effects on the proliferation of a panel of tumor cell lines including both cell lines which are sensitive and resistant to the anticancer drug paclitaxel. The cell lines tested include: A549 human lung adenocarcinoma, NCI-ADR-RES (Formerly MCF-7/ADR) human breast cancer, PANC-1 human pancreatic cancer, AsPC-1 pancreatic adenocarcinoma, MIA PaCa2 human pancreatic carcinoma, DLD-1 human colorectal carcinoma, and P388 murine leukemia cell lines. P388 cells were obtained from Dr. R. Camalier, National Cancer Institute, Bethesda, MD, and A549, PANC-1, AsPC-1, MIA PaCa2, DLD-1 and NCI-ADR-RES cells were obtained from American Type Culture Collection, Rockville, MD. The A549, NCI-ADR-RES, PANC-1, AsPC-1, DLD-1 and P388 cell lines are maintained in Roswell Park Memorial Institute (RPMI) medium 1640 supplemented with 100 U/mL penicillin 100 μg/ml streptomycin, 60 μg/ml L-glutamine, 18 mM HEPES, 0.05 mg/mL gentamycin and 10% fetal bovine serum (for the PANC-1, AsPC-1 and DLD-1 cell lines the media is also supplemented with 100 μg/ml sodium pyruvate and 2.5 mg ml glucose). MIA PaCa2 cells were maintained in Dulbecco's Modified Eagle's Medium (DMEM) containing 4 mM L-glutamine, 4500 mg/L glucose and 1500 mg/L sodium bicarbonate and additionally supplemented with 100 U/mL penicillin 100 μg/ml streptomycin, 0.05 mg/niL gentamycin, 2.5% horse serum, and 10% fetal bovine serum. Cell lines are cultured in plastic tissue culture flasks" and kept in an incubator at 37°C in humidified air containing 5% CO2- To assess the antiproliferative effects of agents against the various cell lines, 200 μl cultures (96- well tissue culture plates,.
Nunc, Denmark) are first established at 3 x 10^ cells/ml for adherent lines (A549, NCI ADR-RES, PANC-1, AsPC-1, MIA-PaCa2, and DLD-1) and 1 x IO5 for non- adherent lines (P388) in tissue culture medium and incubated for 24 hr at 37°C in 10% CO2 in air in order to allow cells to attach. A volume of 100 μl of medium is removed from each test well and 100 μl of medium containing serial, two-fold dilutions of the test agent is added to each well containing tumor cells. Medium without drug is also added to wells containing tumor cells which serve as no drug controls. Positive drug controls are included to monitor drug sensitivity of each of the cell lines. These include varying dilutions of 5-fluorouracil, doxorubicin and Paclitaxel. After 72-h exposures (Adherent cell lines) or 48-hr exposure (Non- adherent cell lines), tumor cells are enumerated using 3-[4,5-Dimethylthiazol-2-yl]- 2,5-diphenyltetrazolium bromide (MTT) (M.C. Alley, et al.,Cancer Res. 48:589, 1988) as follows:
A volume of 75 μl of warm growth media containing 5 mg/ml MTT is added to each well, cultures returned to the incubator, and left undisturbed for 3 hours. To spectrophotometrically quantitate formation of reduced formazan, plates are centrifuged (900 x g, 5 minutes), culture fluids removed by aspiration, and 200 μl of acidified isopropanol (2 ml concentrated HCl/liter isopropanol) added per well. The absorbance of the resulting solutions is measured at 570 nm with a plate reader (Spectra II (Tecan Laboratories). The absorbance of tests wells is divided by the absorbance of drug-free wells, and the concentration of agent that results in 50% of the absorbance of untreated cultures (IC50) is determined by linear regression of logit-transformed data (D. J. Finney, Statistical Method in Biological Assay, third ed., pp.316-348, Charles Griffin Co., London, 1978). A linear relationship between tumor cell number and formazan production has been routinely observed over the range of cell densities observed in these experiments. The two standard drug controls (indicated above) are included in each assay to monitor the drug sensitivity of each of the cell lines and IC50 values are determined for each drug-cell combination. The results in Table 2 below show that the cytotoxic activity of synthetic dictyostatin 1 is essentially the same as that of natural dictyostatin 1. The data also indicates that both natural and synthetic dictyostatin 1 "show significant- activity against the "paclitaxel resistant NCI ADR-Res tumor cell line.
Table 2. IC50 Values for growth inhibition in nM
Figure imgf000178_0001

Claims

Claims
1. A method for the synthesis of dictyostatin or a derivative thereof having the following formula (I):
Figure imgf000179_0001
(I) wherein: each of Ra, Rb, R°, Rd, Re and Rf is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
Ra and Rb together and/or Rc and Rd together and/or Rc and Rf together represent a single bond, a group of formula -CH2- or a group of formula -O-; each of Rs, Rh, R1 and Rj is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy protecting group, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group, an aryl group and an acyl group;
Rk is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group and an aralkyl group;
Rp and Rm are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
Rp and Rm together represent a single bond or a group of formula -CH2- or -O-;
Rn is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (said alkyl group being optionally substituted wititi at least one substituent selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom, an aryl group, an acyl group and an alkoxy group), an alkenyl group (said alkenyl group being optionally substituted with at least one substituent selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom, an aryl group, an acyl group and an alkoxy group), an alkynyl group, a dienyl group and an aryl group;
R° is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group and an aralkyl group;
Rq is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group; an - - alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
Rq and Rh together represent a single bond;
Rr and Rs are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a hydroxy group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, a haloalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
Rr and Rs together represent a single bond or a group of formula -CH2- or -O-;
R4 and Ru are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
R4 and Ru together represent a single bond or a group of formula -CH2- or -O-, or R* and Ru together with the 2 carbon atoms to which they are connected form an aryl group; each of Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a group of formula -NR'R" (wherein R' and R" are the same or different and each is a hydrogen atom, an aryl group or an alkyl group), an alkoxy group and a haloalkoxy group; and
X represents a group of formula -O-, a group of formula -CH2- or a group of formula -NR'-, wherein R' is as defined above; or a salt thereof, said method comprising coupling units of the following formulae (II), (III), (IV) and (V) in any appropriate order, making any necessary changes to the functional groups of the intermediate obtained after each coupling step before performing the next coupling step, subjecting the resulting compound obtained by the coupling of said units of formulae (II), (III), (IN) and (V) to macrocyclisation and, if necessary, subjecting one or more of the functional groups of the resulting macrocyclised compound to one or more reactions to convert said group or groups to a different desired group or groups to give said compound of formula (I):
Figure imgf000181_0001
wherein:
1 1
R is a hydrogen atom and R is selected from the group consisting of -O-P (wherein P1 represents a hydroxy protecting group), a leaving group and a group of formula -CH2-L (wherein L represents a leaving group), or
R1 and R2 together represent a group of formula =O, =ΝR' (wherein R' is as defined above), =N-N(R')2 (wherein each R' is the same or different and is as defined above), or a group of formula =CHM wherein M is selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom, a triflate, Li, Cu, Si(R')3 (wherein each R' is the same or different and is as defined above), Sn(R')3 (wherein each R' is the same or different and is as defined above), B(OR')2 (wherein each R' is the same or different and is as defined above),
MgR' (wherein R' is as defined above), Zn, Na and K, and
R16 is selected from, the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a chiral auxiliary group and a group of formula -CH2-P(R19)3 wherein each R19 is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of =O, an aryl group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
R1, R2 andR16 together with the carbon atom to which they are attached represent an ethynyl group;
R3 represents a group selected from a hydroxy protecting group, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group and an aryl group;
A 9 9
R represents a group of formula -O-P (wherein P represents a hydroxy protecting group) or a group of formula P(R19)3 wherein each R19 is the same or different and is as defined above, and R5 represent a hydrogen atom, or
R4 and R5 together represent a group of formula =O or a group of formula =CHM wherein M is as defined above, or a group of formula =CH-C(=O)(CH3), and
R15 represents a hydrogen atom, or
R4, R5 and R15 together with the carbon atom to which they are attached represent an ethynyl group;
R6 is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a leaving group and a group of formula -CH2-P(R19)3 wherein each R19 is the same or different and is as defined above, and
R7 and R8 each represent a hydrogen atom, or R7 and R8 together represent a group of formula =O, =NR' (wherein R1 is as defined above) or a dithiane group of formula
-S- CH^-S- wherein n1 = 3;
R9 represents a group selected from a hydroxy protecting group, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group and an aryl group;
R10 is a hydrogen atom, R11 is a group of formula -O-P3, wherein P3 represents a hydroxy protecting group and R12 is a formyl group, or
R10 is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a leaving group and a group of formula -CH -P(R19)3 wherein each R19 is the same or different and is as defined above, and R11 and R12 together represent a group of formula =O; n2 is 0 or 1 (if it is 0, the place of the group in brackets is taken by a hydrogen atom);
R13 is selected from the group consisting of a hydroxy protecting group, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group and an aryl group, and
R is a hydrogen atom, or -
R13 and R13' together represent a single bond;
R14 is a hydrogen atom or a carboxy protecting group; - - - -
17 1 R
R and R are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or R17 and R18 together represent a single bond or a group of formula -CH2- or -O-, or R17 and R18 together with the 2 carbon atoms to which they are connected form an aryl group; Y is selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom, a group of formula
90 90
Sn(R )3 (wherein each R is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a group of
90 90 formula Si(R )3 (wherein each R is the same or different and is an alkyl group), and
91 91 a group of formula B(OR )2 wherein each R is the same or different and is an alkyl group or an aryl group;
90
Z is selected from the group consisting of a group of formula Sn(R )3 (wherein each R20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a halogen atom and a group of
91 91 formula B(OR )2 wherein each R is the same or different and is an alkyl group or an aryl group; and
Rk, Rn, R°, Rr, Rs, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz are as defined above.
2. A method according to claim 1 , wherein said compound of formula (I) is a compound of formula (la) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000184_0001
(la)
3. A method according to claim 1 , wherein said compound of formula (I) is a compound of formula (lb) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000184_0002
(lb)
4. A method according to claim 1, wherein said compound of formula (I) is a compound of formula (Ic) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000184_0003
5. A method according to claim 1 , wherein said compound of formula (I) is a compound of formula (Id) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000185_0001
(Id)
6. A method according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein R is a methyl group.
7. A method according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein each of Rp and R" represents a hydrogen atom.
8. A method according to claim 1, for the synthesis of dictyostatin having the following formula (Ie) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000185_0002
(Ie)
9. A method according to claim 1 , for the synthesis of dictyostatin having the following formula (If) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000185_0003
(If)
10. A method according to claim 1, comprising the following steps:
(a) coupling of a compound of formula (Ila) and a compound of formula (Ilia)
Figure imgf000186_0001
wherein each of said groups of formula R19a are the same or different and represents an alkoxy group or a haloalkoxy group, to give a compound of formula (VI):
Figure imgf000186_0002
(b) converting the double bond of the enone of said compound of formula (VI) to a single bond and reducing the carbonyl group thereof to a protected hydroxyl group of formula -OP4 to give a group of formula (VII):
Figure imgf000186_0003
(c) deprotecting the group -OP2 to give a hydroxyl group and then oxidising the resulting hydroxyl group to give a compound of formula (VIII):
Figure imgf000187_0001
(d) coupling the compound of formula (NIII) with a compound of formula (IVa):
Figure imgf000187_0002
(IVa) wherein Y is a halogen atom, to give a compound of formula (IX):
Figure imgf000187_0003
(e) coupling said compound of formula (IX) with a compound of formula (Na):
Figure imgf000187_0004
(Va)
to give a compound of formula (X):
Figure imgf000188_0001
(f) subjecting said compound of formula (X) to a macrolactonisation reaction to give a compound of formula (XI):
Figure imgf000188_0002
(XI)
(g) reducing the ketone group at the C-9 position to a hydroxyl group to give a compound of formula (Ig) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000188_0003
(h) and, if desired, removing any protecting groups R3, R13 and P4 from said compound of formula (Ig) to give hydroxyl groups and/or converting one or more of said groups and the hydroxyl group at the C-9 position to other functional groups of formulae Rg, R1, R* and R respectively to give a compound of formula (Hi) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000189_0001
(Ih)
11. A method according to claim 10, wherein said coupling step (a) is performed under Horner- Wadsworth-Emmons olefination conditions.
12. A method according to claim 10 or claim 11, wherein said coupling step (d) is performed under Still-Gennari Homer- Wadsworth-Emmons olefination conditions, the group of formula P(R19)3 in said compound of formula (INa) being a group of formula P(O)(OR19a)2 wherein each of said groups of formula OR19a is the same or different and represent an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group or a haloalkoxy group (preferably a 2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy group).
13. A method according to any one of claims 10 to 12, wherein said coupling step (e) is performed under Liebeskind or Stille coupling conditions, the substituent R14 being a trialkylsilyl group (preferably a triisopropylsilyl group) and each substituent R20 being an n-butyl group in said compound of formula (Va).
14. A method according to any one of claims 10 to 13, wherein said macrolactonisation step (f) is performed under Yamaguchi conditions.
15. A method according to any one of claims 10 to 14, wherein the reduction of the C-9 carbonyl group is conducted under Luche conditions using sodium borohydride and caesium trichloride.
16. A method according to any one of claims 10 to 15 for the synthesis of a compound of formula (Ih) or a salt thereof, wherein each of R°, Rr and Rs is the same or different and is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group (preferably each is a hydrogen atom).
17. A method according to any one of claims 10 to 16 for the synthesis of a compound of formula (Hi) or a salt thereof, wherein each of Rk, Rv, R , Rx, Ry and Rz is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group and an aralkyl group.
18. A method according to claim 17 for the synthesis of a compound of formula (Hi) or a salt thereof, wherein each of Rk, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz is the same or different and is an alkyl group.
19. A method according to claim 18 for the synthesis of a compound of formula (Hi) or a salt thereof, wherein each of Rk, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz is a methyl group.
20. A method according to any one of claims 10 to 19 for the synthesis of a compound of formula (Hi) or a salt thereof, wherein each of Rs, Rh, R1 and RJ is the same or different and is selected the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group, an aryl group, an alkylcarbonyl group, a haloalkylcarbonyl group, an arylcarbonyl group and a trialkylsilyl group.
21. A method according to claim 20 for the synthesis of a compound of formula (Ih) or a salt thereof, wherein each of Rg, Rh, R1 and RJ is a hydrogen atom.
22. A method according to any one of claims 10 to 21 for the synthesis of a
1 1 1 compound of formula (Hi) or a salt thereof, wherein each of R and R is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group or an aryl group, or R17 and R18 together with the 2 carbon atoms to which they are connected form an aryl group.
23. A method according to claim 22 for the synthesis of a compound of formula
17 1 R
(Ih), wherein each of R and R is a hydrogen atom.
24. A method according to claim 10 for the synthesis of a compound of formula (Ii) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000191_0001
(H)
25. A method according to claim 10 for the synthesis of a compound of formula (Ij) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000191_0002
(Ij)
26. A method according to claim 10 for the synthesis of a compound of formula (If) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000191_0003
(if)
27. "" A method according to any one of claims 10 to 26, wherein one or more of the double bonds in said compound of formula (If), (Ig), (Ih), (Ii) or (Ij) is reduced to give a single bond or bonds.
28. A method according to any one of claims 10 to 27, wherein one or more of the hydroxyl groups in said compound of formula (If), (Ig), (Ih), (Ii) or (Ij) is oxidised to give one or more carbonyl groups.
29. A method according to any one of claims 10 to 28, wherein one or more of the double bonds in said compound of formula (If), (Ig), (Ih), (Ii) or (Ij) is subjected to epoxidation or cyclopropanation to give a compound of formula (I) wherein one or more of Ra and Rb together and/or Rc and Rd together and/or Re and Rf together represents a group of formula -CH2- or a group of formula -O-.
30. A method according to any one of claims 10 to 29, wherein one or more hydroxyl groups in said compound of formula (If), (Ig), (Ih), (Ii) or (Ij) or in intermediates in said method are subjected to etherification or esterification to give a compound of formula (I) having one or more etherified or esterified groups.
31. A method according to claim 10, wherein the intermediate of formula (XI):
Figure imgf000192_0001
(XI)
is subjected to a conjugate addition reaction with a compound of formula R lML wherein Ral is selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group, an aryl group and an aralkyl group and M1 is selected from copper and magnesium to give an intermediate of formula (XII):
Figure imgf000193_0001
the C-9 ketone of said intermediate of formula (XII) then being reduced to give a compound of formula (Ik) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000193_0002
and, if desired, removing any protecting groups R3, R13 and P4 from said compound of formula (Ik) to give hydroxyl groups and or converting one or more of said groups and the hydroxyl group at the C-9 position to other functional groups of formulae Rg, R1, RJ and Rh respectively to give further compounds of formula (I) or salts thereof.
32. A method according to claim 10, wherein the intermediate of formula (XT):
Figure imgf000193_0003
(XI) is subjected to a 1,2 nucleophilic reaction with a compound of formula RqlM! wherein Rql is selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group, an aryl group and an aralkyl group and M1 is selected from lithium, sodium, magnesium and potassium to "" ' give a compound of formula (II) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000194_0001
(II)
and, if desired, removing any protecting groups R3, R13 and P4 from said compound of formula (II) to give hydroxyl groups and/or converting one or more of said groups and the hydroxyl group at the C-9 position to other functional groups of formulae Rg, R1, Rj and Rh respectively to give further compounds of formula (I) or salts thereof.
33. A method according to claim 10, wherein in step (b), instead of reducing the double bond of the enone of the intermediate of formula (VI) to a single bond it is subjected to a conjugate addition reaction with a compound of formula RplM2 wherein Rpl is selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group, an aryl group and an aralkyl group and M2 is selected from copper and magnesium before reducing the carbonyl group to a protected hydroxy group to give an intermediate of formula (Vila):
Figure imgf000194_0002
said intermediate of formula (Vila) then being subjected to the remaining steps (c) to (h) of claim 10 to give a compound of formula (Im) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000195_0001
34. A method according to claim 1 comprising the following steps:
(a) subjecting an intermediate of formula (VIII) as defined in claim 10 to a Stork- Wittig reaction to give the following intermediate of formula (XIII):
Figure imgf000195_0002
wherein Hal is a halogen atom (preferably an iodine atom);
(b) coupling the compound of formula (XIII) with a compound of formula (IVg):
Figure imgf000195_0003
(IVg)
9 90 90 wherein Y is a halogen atom, a group of formula Sn(R )3 (wherein each R is the
90 same or different and is an alkyl group), a group of formula Si(R )3 (wherein each R20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a group of formula B(OR 1)2 wherein each R21 is the same or different and is an alkyl group or an aryl group,~a group of formula CHCHCO2R14 or a group of formula CCCO2R14 and R°, Rv, R13 and R14 are as defined in claim 1, to give a compound of formula (XTN):
Figure imgf000196_0001
(c) where Y2 is a halogen atom, coupling said compound of formula (XIV) with a compound of formula (Va) as defined in claim 10:
Figure imgf000196_0002
(Va)
to give a compound of formula (XV):
Figure imgf000196_0003
(d) subj ecting said compound of formula (XV) or said compound of formula (XIN) wherein Y2 is a group of formula CHCHCO2R14 or a group of formula CCCO2R14to a macrolactonisation reaction to give a compound of formula (Ig):
Figure imgf000197_0001
(e) and, if desired, removing any protecting groups R3, R1 and P4 from said compound of formula (Ig) to give hydroxyl groups and/or converting one or more of said groups and the hydroxyl group at the C-9 position to other functional groups of formulae Rg, R1, R* and Rh respectively to give further compounds of formula (Ih) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000197_0002
(Ih)
35. A method according to claim 1 comprising the following steps:
(a) subjecting an intermediate of formula (NIII) as defined in claim 10 to a reaction to convert the aldehyde group thereof to an alkynyl group to give the following intermediate of formula (XNI):
Figure imgf000198_0001
(XVI)
(b) converting said compound of formula (XNI) to the metallated alkynyl derivative thereof and reacting this with a compound of formula (IVb):
Figure imgf000198_0002
(IVb) wherein L1 is a leaving group (preferably a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a triflate, a mesylate or a tosylate), Y2 is a halogen atom, a group of formula Sn(R20)3 (wherein each R20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a group of formula Si(R20)3
90
(wherein each R is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a group of formula B(OR21)2 wherein each R21 is the same or different and is an alkyl group or an aryl group, a group of formula CHCHCO2R14 or a group of formula CCCO2R14 and R°, Rv, R13 and R14 are as defined in claim 1 above, to give a compound of formula (XVII):
Figure imgf000198_0003
(XVII)
(c) hydrogenating the triple bond group to a double bond to give a compound of formula (XNIII):
Figure imgf000199_0001
(XVIII)
(d) where Y2 is a halogen atom, coupling said compound of formula (XNIII) with a compound of formula (Na) as defined in claim 10:
Figure imgf000199_0002
(Va)
to give a compound of formula (X) as defined in claim 10;
(e) subjecting said compound of formula (X) or said compound of formula (XNIII) wherein Y2 is a group of formula CHCHCO2R14 or a group of formula CCCO2R14to a macrolactonisation reaction to give a compound of formula (XI) as defined in claim 10;
(f) subjecting said compound of formula (XI) to step (g) as defined in claim 10 to give a compound of formula (Ig) or a salt thereof as defined in claim 10 and, if desired, removing any protecting groups R3, R13 and P4 from said compound of formula (Ig) to give hydroxyl groups and/or converting one or more of said groups and the hydroxyl group at the C-9 position to other functional groups of formulae Rg, R1, R" and Rh respectively to give a compound of formula (Ih) or a salt thereof as defined in claim 10.
36. A method according to claim 1, comprising the following steps: (a) reacting a compound of formula (IX) as defined in claim 10:
Figure imgf000200_0001
(IX) with a compound of formula (Na) as defined in ι claim 10:
Figure imgf000200_0002
(Va) under Yamaguchi esterification conditions to give a compound of formula (XTX):
Figure imgf000200_0003
(XIX) (b) subjecting said compound of formula (XIX) to a coupling reaction (preferably a Stille coupling or a coupling using copper I thiophenecarboxylate) to give a compound of formula (XI) as defined in claim 10 above; and
(c) subjecting said compound of formula (XI) to step (g) of claim 10 to give a compound of formula (Ig) or a salt thereof and, if desired, subjecting said compound of formula (Ig) to step (h) of claim 10 to give a compound of formula (Di) or a salt thereof.
37. A method according to claim 1 comprising the following steps:
(a) reacting a compound of formula (Nil) as defined in claim 10 with a compound of formula (Nb) under Yamaguchi esterification conditions:
Figure imgf000201_0001
(Vb)
wherein R17 and R18 are as defined in claim 1 and Z1 is a halogen atom or a group of
90 90 formula Sn(R )3 wherein R is as defined in claim 1 , to give a compound of formula (XX):
Figure imgf000201_0002
(XX)
(b) selectively removing the protecting group P and oxidising the resulting hydroxy group to give a compound of formula (XXI):
Figure imgf000202_0001
(XXI)
(c) coupling said compound of formula (XXI) with a compound of formula (INb):
Figure imgf000202_0002
(IVb)
wherein Y2 represents a halogen atom or a group of formula Sn(R20)3 wherein R20 is as defined in claim 1, to give a compound of formula (XXII):
Figure imgf000202_0003
(d) subjecting said compound of formula (XXII) to a coupling reaction (preferably a Stille coupling or a coupling using copper I thiophenecarboxylate) to give a compound of formula (XI) as defined in claim 10 above; and
(e) subjecting said compound of formula (XI) to step (g) of claim 10 to give a compound of formula (Ig) or a salt thereof and, if desired, subjecting said compound of formula (Ig) to step (g) of claim 10 to give a compound of formula (Hi) or a salt thereof.
38. A method according to" claim I comprising the following steps:
(a) deprotecting the OP2 group of a compound of formula (Nil) as defined in claim 10, and converting the resulting hydroxyl group to give a compound of formula (XXIII) wherein said group Q is a group of formula P(R19b)3 +I", wherein each R19b is the same or different and is an aryl group, or to a group of formula P(O)(OR19c)2 wherein each R19c is the same or different and is an alkyl group, a haloalkyl group or an aryl group:
Figure imgf000203_0001
(b) coupling said compound of formula (XXIII) with a compound of formula (INc) under Wittig conditions:
Figure imgf000203_0002
(IVc)
wherein P5 is a hydrogen atom or a hydroxy protecting group, Hal is a halogen atom and R°, Rv and R13 are as defined in claim 1, to give a compound of formula (XXIN):
Figure imgf000204_0001
(c) subjecting said compound of formula (XXIN) to steps (e) and (f) as defined in claim 10 to give a compound of formula (Ig) or a salt thereof and, if desired, subjecting said compound of formula (Ig) to step (h) as defined in claim 10 to give a compound of formula (Ih).
39. A method according to claim 1 comprising the following steps:
(a) reacting compounds of formulae (lib) and (Illb):
Figure imgf000204_0002
wherein L1 is a leaving group (preferably a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a triflate, a mesylate or a tosylate) and all other groups are as defined in claim 1 to give a compound of formula (XXV):
Figure imgf000204_0003
(b) reducing the ketone group of said compound of formula (XXV) to a hydroxy group and protecting said group to give a compound of formula (VII) as defined in claim 10;
(c) subjecting said compound of formula (Nil) to steps (c), (d), (e), (f), (g) and optionally (h) as defined in claim 10 to give a compound of formula (Ig) or (Hi) or salts thereof.
40. A method according to claim 1 comprising the following steps:
(a) reacting compounds of formulae (lie) and (IIIc):
wherein L is a leaving group (preferably a halogen atom, a triflate, a mesylate or a tosylate) and all other groups are as defined in claim 1 in a dithiane alkylation and then removing the dithiane group to give a compound of formula (XXV) as defined in claim 39;
(b) reducing the ketone group of said compound of formula (XXV) to a hydroxy group and protecting said group to give a compound of formula (VII) as defined in claim 10;
(c) subjecting said compound of formula (VII) to steps (c), (d), (e), (f), (g) and optionally (h) as defined in claim 10 to give a compound of formula (Ig) or (Hi) or salts thereof.
41. A method according to claim 1 comprising the following steps:
(a) reacting compounds of formulae (lid) and (Hid):
Figure imgf000206_0001
9 wherein M is a selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom, Si(R')3 (wherein R' is as defined in claim 1), Sn(R')3 (wherein R' is as defined is as defined in claim 1) and B(OR')2 (wherein R' is as defined is as defined in claim 1), Q2 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom or an alkoxy group, and all other substituents are as defined in claim 1, to give a compound of formula (NI) as defined in claim 10;
(c) subjecting said compound of formula (NI) to steps (b), (c), (d), (e), (f), (g) and optionally (h) as defined in claim 10 to give a compound of formula (Ig) or (Ih) or salts thereof.
42. A method according to claim 1 comprising the following steps:
(a) coupling compounds of formulae (INd) and (Vc):
Figure imgf000206_0002
(IVd) (Vc)
to give a compound of formula (XXVI):
Figure imgf000206_0003
(XXVI)
(b) removing the protecting group R13 from said compound of formula (XXVI) and oxidising the resulting hydroxyl group to give a formyl group, optionally hydrogenating the triple bond of said compound before doing so, to give a compound of formula (XXVIIa) or (XXVIIb):
Figure imgf000207_0001
(XXVπa) (XXVIIb)
(c) reacting said compound of formula (XXVIIa) or (XXNIIb) with a compound of formula (He):
Figure imgf000207_0002
wherein Alk is an alkyl group and all other groups are as defined in claim 1, to give a compound of formula (XXNIIIa) or (XXNIIIb):
Figure imgf000207_0003
(XXVπia) (xxvπib)
(d) for said compound of formula (XXNIIIa), hydrogenating the triple bond thereof to give a compound of formula (XXNIIIb);
(e) reducing the CO2Alk group of said compound of formula (XXNIIIb) to an aldehyde group and the C-9 carbonyl group to a hydroxy group to give a compound of formula (XXIX):
Figure imgf000208_0001
(XXDC)
(f) reacting said compound of formula (XXDC) with a compound of formula (Ilia) as defined in (10) above, to give a compound of formula (XXX):
Figure imgf000208_0002
(XXX)
(g) selectively reducing the double bond of the enone of said compound of formula (XXX) to a single bond, converting the carbonyl group of said enone to a protected hydroxyl group and oxidizing the C-9 hydroxy group to a carbonyl group to give a compound of formula (X) as defined in (10) above;
(h) subjecting said compound of formula (X) to the reactions of steps (f) and (g) of claim 10 to give a compound of formula (Ig) or a salt thereof and, if desired, further subjecting said compound of formula (Ig) to the reactions of step (h) of claim 10 to give a compound of formula (In).
43. A method according to claim 1 comprising the following steps:
(a) converting the aldehyde group in a compound of formula (VIII) as defined in claim 10 to an ethynyl group to give a compound of formula (XXXI):
Figure imgf000209_0001
(XXXI)
(b) converting said compound of formula (XXXI) to the metallated alkynyl derivative thereof and reacting this with a compound of formula (IVe):
Figure imgf000209_0002
(IVe) wherein Y2 is a halogen atom, a group of formula CHCHCO2R14 or a group of formula CCCO2R14 and R°, Rv, R13 and R14 are as defined in claim 1, and Hal is a halogen atom, to give a compound of formula (XXXII):
Figure imgf000209_0003
(c) hydrogenating the triple bond group to a double bond to give a compound of formula (XXXIII):
Figure imgf000210_0001
(XXXIII)
(d) where Y2 is a halogen atom, coupling said compound of formula (XXXIII) with a compound of formula (Va) as defined in claim 10:
Figure imgf000210_0002
(Va)
to give a compound of formula (X) as defined in claim 10;
(e) subjecting said compound of formula (X) or said compound of formula (XXXIII) wherein Y2 is a group of formula CHCHCO2R14 or a group of formula CCCO2R14to a macrolactonisation reaction to give a compound of formula (XI) as defined in claim 10;
(f) subjecting said compound of formula (XI) to the reaction of step (g) of claim 10 to give a compound of formula (Ig) or a salt thereof and, if desired, further subjecting said compound of formula (Ig) to the reactions of step (h) of claim 10 to give a compound of formula (Hi).
44. A method according to claim 1 comprising the following steps:
(a) reacting a compound of formula (Ilf):
Figure imgf000211_0001
wherein R , Rr, Rs, Rw, Rx, R3 and P1 are as defined in claim 1, with a compound of formula (IVa) as defined in claim 10, to give a compound of formula (XXXIV):
Figure imgf000211_0002
(XXXIV) (b) reducing the C-7 carbonyl of said compound of formula (XXXIN) and protecting the resulting hydroxy group to give a compound of formula (XXXV):
Figure imgf000211_0003
(XXXIV) wherein R13 is a hydroxy protecting group;
(b) reducing the C-7 carbonyl of said compound of formula (XXXTV) and protecting the resulting hydroxy group to give a compound of formula (XXXN):
Figure imgf000212_0001
(XXXV) wherein R13 is a hydroxy protecting group;
(c) converting the group OP1 in said compound of formula (XXXN) to an aldehyde group to give a compound of formula (XXXNI):
Figure imgf000212_0002
(d) reacting said compound of formula (XXXNI) with a compound of formula (Ilia) as defined in claim 10 to give a compound of formula (XXXNII):
Figure imgf000212_0003
(XXXVII)
(e) converting the double bond of the enone of said compound of formula (XXXNII) to a single bond and reducing the carbonyl group thereof to a protected hydroxyl group of formula -OP4 to give a group of formula (XXXVIII):
Figure imgf000213_0001
(XXXVIII)
(f) coupling said compound of formula (XXXNIII) with a compound of formula (Va) as defined in claim 10 to give a compound of formula (XV) as defined in claim
34;
(g) subjecting said compound of formula (XV) to a macrolactonisation reaction to give a compound of formula (Ig) or a salt thereof as defined in claim 10;
(h) and, if desired, removing any protecting groups R3, R13 and P4 from said compound of formula (Ig) to give hydroxyl groups and/or converting one or more of said groups and the hydroxyl group at the C-9 position to other functional groups of formulae Rg, R1, Rj and Rh respectively to give a compound of formula (Hi) or a salt thereof as defined in claim 10.
45. A method for the synthesis of a dictyostatin analogue of formula (XXXIX) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000213_0002
(XXXIX) wherein R22 is selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a group of formula -NR'R" (wherein R' and R" are the same or different and each is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), an alkoxy group and a haloalkoxy group and the other groups are as defined in claim 1, said method comprising the following steps:
(a) reducing the double bond of the enone of a compound of formula (XXXNII) as defined in claim 44 to a single bond to give a compound of formula (XL):
Figure imgf000214_0001
(XL)
(b) subjecting said compound of formula (XL) to a vinyl halide coupling reaction to give a compound of formula (XLI):
Figure imgf000214_0002
(c) converting the carbonyl group of said compound of formula (XLI) to a group of formula -OR" and said groups R3 and R13 to groups of formulae R and R1 respectively to give a dictyostatin analogue of formula (XXXIX) or a salt thereof.
46. A method for the synthesis of a dictyostatin analogue of formula (XLII) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000215_0001
(XLII)
wherein R23 is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy protecting group, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group, an aryl group and an acyl group and the other groups are as defined in claim 1, said method comprising the following steps:
(a) deprotecting the C-l 9 alcohol in the compound of formula (X) as defined in claim 10 to give a compound of formula (XLIII):
Figure imgf000215_0002
(XLIII)
(b) subjecting said compound of formula (XLIII) to a macrolactonisation reaction to give a compound of formula (XLIN):
Figure imgf000216_0001
(XLIV)
(c) reducing the ketone group at the C-9 position to a hydroxyl group to give a compound of formula (XLN) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000216_0002
(XLIV)
(d) and, where needed, removing any protecting groups R3, R13 and R9 from said compound of formula (XLIN) to give hydroxyl groups and/or converting one or more of said groups and the hydroxyl group at the C-9 position to other functional groups of formulae Rs, R1, R23 and Rh respectively to give a compound of formula (XLIII) or a salt thereof.
47. A method for the synthesis of a dictyostatin analogue of formula (XLN) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000216_0003
(XLV) wherein Rg, Rh, R, Rj, R , Rn, Rr, Rs, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz are as defined in claim 1, said method comprising the following steps:
(a) performing a palladium catalysed cabonylation reaction on a compound of formula (LX) as defined in claim 10 to give a compound of formula (XLNI):
Figure imgf000217_0001
wherein R3, R9, R13, P4, R , Rn, Rr, Rs, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz are as defined in claim 10;
(b) subjecting said compound of formula (XLNI) to a macrolactonisation reaction to give a compound of formula (XLNII):
Figure imgf000217_0002
(c) reducing the ketone group at the C-7 position to a hydroxyl group to give a compound of formula (XLNIII) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000218_0001
(XLVIII)
(h) and, where needed, removing any protecting groups R3, R13 and P4 from said compound of formula (XLNIII) to give hydroxyl groups and/or converting one or more of said groups and the hydroxyl group at the C-7 position to other functional groups of formulae Rg, R1, RJ and Rh respectively to give a compound of formula (XLN) or a salt thereof.
48. A method for the synthesis of a dictyostatin analogue of formula (In) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000218_0002
(In)
wherein Rg, Rh, R1, Rj, Rk, Rn, Rr, Rs, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz are as defined in claim 1, said method comprising the following steps:
(a) perfoπning a Sonagashira coupling reaction on a compound of formula (IX) as defined in claim 10 to give a compound of formula (IL):
Figure imgf000219_0001
wherein R3, R9, R13, P4, Rk, Rn, Rr, Rs, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz are as defined in claim' ~ 10;
(b) subjecting said compound of formula (IL) to a macrolactonisation reaction to give a compound of formula (L):
Figure imgf000219_0002
(c) reducing the ketone group at the C-9 position to a hydroxyl group to give a compound of formula (LI) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000219_0003
(d) and, where needed, removing any protecting groups R3, R13 and P4 from said compound of formula (LI) to give hydroxyl groups and/or converting one or more of said groups and the hydroxyl group at the C-9 position to other functional groups of formulae Rg, R', RJ and Rh respectively to give a compound of formula (In) or a salt thereof.
49. A method for the synthesis of a dictyostatin analogue of formula (LII) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000220_0001
(LII)
wherein Rg, Rh, R Rj, Rk, Rn, Rr, Rs, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz are as defined in claim 1 and n3 is an integer of from 1 to 4, said method comprising the following steps:
(a) performing a palladium catalysed coupling reaction (preferably Suzuki or Negishi) on a compound of formula (DC) as defined in claim 10 with a compound of formula M3-(CH2)n3-CH2OP6, wherein M3 is selected from the group consisting of B(OR')2 (wherein R' is as defined is as defined in claim 1 above) and ZnR' (wherein R' is as defined is as defined in claim 1 above), P6 is a hydroxy protecting group and n3 is as defined above, followed by deprotection of the CH2OP6 group and oxidation of the resulting primary hydroxy group to a carboxy group to give a compound of formula (LIII):
Figure imgf000221_0001
wherein R3, R9, R13, P4, Rk, Rn, Rr, Rs, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz are as defined in claim 10;
(b) subjecting said compound of formula (LIII) to a macrolactonisation reaction to give a compound of formula (LIN):
Figure imgf000221_0002
(c) reducing the ketone group at the C-9 position to a hydroxyl group to give a compound of formula (LN):
Figure imgf000221_0003
(d) and, where needed, removing any protecting groups R3, R13 and P4 from said compound of formula (LN) to give hydroxyl groups and/or converting one or more of said groups and the hydroxyl group at the C-9 position to other functional groups of formulae Rg, R1, Rj and Rh respectively to give a compound of formula (LII) or a salt thereof.
50. A compound having the following formula (Io) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000222_0001
(Io) wherein: each of Ra, Rb, Rc, Rd, Re and Rf is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
Ra and Rb together and/or Rc and Rd together and or Re and Rf together represent a single bond, a group of formula -CH2- or a group of formula -O-; each of Rg, Rh, R1 and RJ is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy protecting group, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group, an aryl group and an acyl group;
Rk is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group and an aralkyl group; Rp and Rm are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
Rp and Rm together represent a single bond or a group of formula -CH2- or -O-;
Rn is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (said alkyl group being optionally substituted with at least one substituent selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom, an aryl group, an acyl group and an alkoxy group), an alkenyl group (said alkenyl group being optionally substituted with at least one substituent selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom, an aryl group, an acyl group and an alkoxy group), an alkynyl group, a dienyl group and an aryl group;
R° is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group and an aralkyl group;
Rq is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group,
Rr and Rs are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a hydroxy group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
Rr and Rs together represent a single bond or a group of formula -CH2- or -O-;
R* and Ru are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, a haloalkoxy group and an aryloxy group, or
R* and Ru together represent a single bond or a group of formula -CH2- or -O-, or R* and Ru together with the 2 carbon atoms to which they are connected form an aryl group; each of Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a group of formula - NR'R" (wherein R' and R" are the same or different and each is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), an alkoxy group and a haloalkoxy group; and
X represents a group of formula -O-, a group of formula -CH2- or a group of formula -NR', wherein R' is as defined above.
51. A compound according to claim 50, wherein said compound of formula (Io) is a compound of formula (Ip) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000224_0001
(ip)
52. A compound according to claim 50, wherein said compound of formula (Io) is a compound of formula (Iq) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000224_0002
(iq)
53. A compound according to claim 50, wherein said compound of formula (Io) is a compound of formula (Ir) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000225_0001
54. A compound according to any one of claims 50 to 53 or a salt thereof, wherein each of R°, Rr and Rs is the same or different and is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
55. A compound according to any one of claims 50 to 53 or a salt thereof, wherein each of R°, Rr and Rs is a hydrogen atom.
56. A compound according to any one of claims 50 to 55 or a salt thereof, wherein each of Rk, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group and an aralkyl group.
57. A compound according to claim 56 or a salt thereof, wherein each of Rk, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz is the same or different and is an alkyl group.
58. A compound according to claim 56 or a salt thereof, wherein each of Rk, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz is a methyl group.
59. A compound according to any one of claims 50 to 58 or a salt thereof, wherein each of Rg, Rh, R1 and RJ is the same or different and is selected the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group, an aryl group, an alkylcarbonyl group, a haloalkylcarbonyl group, an arylcarbonyl group and a trialkylsilyl group.
60. A compound according to claim 59 or a salt thereof, wherein each of R , Rh, R1 and RJ is a hydrogen atom.
61. A compound according to any one of claims 50 to 60 or a salt thereof, wherein each of R* and Ru is the same or different and is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group or an aryl group.
62. A compound according to claim 61 or a salt thereof, wherein each of Rl and Ru is a hydrogen atom.
63. A compound according to any one of claims 50 to 62 or a salt thereof, wherein Rn is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (said alkyl group being optionally substituted with at least one substituent selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom and an aryl group), an alkenyl group (said alkenyl group being optionally substituted with at least one substituent selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom and an aryl group), a dienyl group and an aryl group.
64. A compound according to claim 63 or a salt thereof, wherein Rn is a dienyl group.
65. A compound according to claim 63 or a salt thereof, wherein Rn is a 1 ,3- butadienyl group.
66. A compound according to claim 50 or a salt thereof having the following formula (Is):
Figure imgf000227_0001
67. A compound according to claim 50 or a salt thereof having the following formula (It):
Figure imgf000227_0002
(It)
68. A dictyostatin analogue of formula (XXXIX) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000227_0003
(XXXIX)
wherein R22 is selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a haloalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a group of formula -NR'R" (wherein R' and R" are the same or different and each is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), an alkoxy group and a haloalkoxy group and R9, R , Rh, Rj, Rj, Rk, Rn, Rr, Rs, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz are as defined in claim 1.
69. A dictyostatin analogue of formula (XLII) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000228_0001
(XLII)
wherein R23 is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy protecting group, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group, an aryl group and an acyl group and R17, R18, Rg, Rh, R Rk, Rn, Rr, Rs, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz are as defined in claim 1.
70. A dictyostatin analogue of formula (XLN) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000228_0002
(XLV)
wherein Rg, Rh, R\ Rj, Rk, Rn, Rr, Rs, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz are as defined in claim 1.
71. A dictyostatin analogue of formula (In) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000229_0001
(In)
wherein Rg, Rh, R1, RJ, Rκ, Rn, Rr, Rs, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz are as defined in claim 1.
72. A dictyostatin analogue of formula (LII) or a salt thereof:
Figure imgf000229_0002
(LII)
wherein Rg, Rh, R1, Rj, Rk, Rn, Rr, Rs, Rv, Rw, Rx, Ry and Rz are as defined in claim 1 and n3 is an integer of from 1 to 4.
73. A compound of formula (II) :
Figure imgf000229_0003
(II)
wherein - Rn l1SD, T R) 1160, r R>kκ, τ Rτ>rr, r R> S
Figure imgf000229_0004
s, n Rw a —nd j τ R>xxare as defined in claim 1.
74. A compound according to claim 73 of formula (Ilg):
Figure imgf000230_0001
(Ilg)
75. A compound according to claim 73 of formula (Ila):
Figure imgf000230_0002
wherein P is a hydroxy protecting group and R , R , Rr, Rs, R and Rx are as defined in claim 1.
76. A compound according to claim 75 of formula (Ila'):
Figure imgf000230_0003
(Ila1)
77. A compound according to claim 73 of formula (lib):
Figure imgf000231_0001
wherein L1 is a leaving group (preferably a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a triflate group, a mesylate group or a tosylate group), P2 is a hydroxy protecting group and R3, Rk, Rr, R , Rw and Rx are as defined in claim 1.
78. A compound according to claim 77 of formula (lib'):
Figure imgf000231_0002
(lib')
79. A compound according to claim 73 of formula (lie):
Figure imgf000231_0003
wherein L is a leaving group (preferably a halogen atom, a triflate group, a mesylate group or a tosylate group), P2 is a hydroxy protecting group and R3, Rk, Rr, Rs, Rw and Rx are as defined in claim 1.
80. A compound according to claim 79 of formula (He'):
Figure imgf000232_0001
(πc)
81. A compound according to claim 73 of formula (lid):
Figure imgf000232_0002
wherein M is a selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom, Si(R')3 (wherein R' is as defined in claim 1), Sn(R')3 (wherein R' is as defined is as defined in claim 1) and B(OR')3 (wherein R' is as defined is as defined in claim 1), P2 is a hydroxy protecting group and R , R , R τjr , R 0s , R τ>w and R are as defined in claim 1.
82. A compound according to claim 81 of formula (lid'):
Figure imgf000232_0003
(Hd')
83. A compound according to claim 73 of formula (He):
Figure imgf000233_0001
wherein Alk is an alkyl group and R 3 , τ R>k , τ R>rr, τ R>ss, τ Rw and Λ T RX a . re as defined in claim 1
84. A compound according to claim 83 of formula (lie'):
Figure imgf000233_0002
85. A compound according to claim 73 of formula (Ilf):
Figure imgf000233_0003
r
Figure imgf000233_0004
R>k, r R>rr, τ R>ss, τ R>ww and j r R, are as defined in claim 1.
86. A compound according to claim 85 of formula (Ilf):
Figure imgf000234_0001
87. A compound of formula (III):
Figure imgf000234_0002
Cm) wherein R6, R7, R , R9, Rn, Ry and Rz are as defined in claim 1.
88. A compound according to claim 87 of formula (Ille):
Figure imgf000234_0003
(Hie)
89. A compound according to claim 87 of formula (Ilia):
Figure imgf000234_0004
(ma)
wherein R9, Rn, Ry and Rz are as defined in claim 1 and each of said groups of formula R19a is the same or different and represents an alkoxy group or a haloalkoxy group.
90. A compound according to claim 89 of formula (Ilia'):
Figure imgf000235_0001
(iπa')
91. A compound according to claim 87 of formula (Illb) :
Figure imgf000235_0002
(Illb) wherein R9, Rn, Ry and Rz are as defined in claim 1.
92. A compound according to claim 91 of formula (Illb') :
Figure imgf000235_0003
(Illb')
93. A compound according to claim 87 of formula (IIIc):
Figure imgf000235_0004
(iπc) wherein R , Rn, Ry and Rz are as defined in claim 1.
94. A compound according to claim 93 of formula (IIIc'):
Figure imgf000236_0001
95. A compound according to claim 87 of formula (Hid):
Figure imgf000236_0002
wherein R9, Rn, Ry and Rz are as defined in claim 1 and Q2 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom or an alkoxy group.
96. A compound according to claim 95 of formula (Hid'):
Figure imgf000236_0003
(Hid')
97. A compound of formula (IN):
Figure imgf000236_0004
wherein R10, R11, R12, R13, R°, Rv, Y and n2 are as defined in claim 1.
98. A compound according to claim 97 of formula (INf):
Figure imgf000237_0001
99. A compound according to claim 97 of formula (IVa):
Figure imgf000237_0002
(TVa) wherein R13, R19, R° and Rv are as defined in claim 1 and Y1 is a halogen atom, a
90 90 group of formula Sn(R )3 (wherein each R is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a group of formula Si(R 0)3 (wherein each R20 is the same or different and is
91 91 an alkyl group), or a group of formula B(OR ) wherein each R is the same or different and is an alkyl group or an aryl group.
100. A compound according to claim 99 of formula (INa'):
Figure imgf000237_0003
(TVa1)
101. A compound according to claim 97 of formula (IVb):
Figure imgf000237_0004
(IVb) wherein L1 is a leaving group (preferably a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a triflate, a mesylate or a tosylate), Y2 is a halogen atom, a group of formula Sn(R20)3 (wherein each R20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a group of formula Si(R20)3 (wherein each R20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a group of formula B(OR21)2 wherein each R21 is the same or different and is an alkyl group or an aryl group, a group of formula CHCHCO2R14 or a group of formula CCCO2R14 and R°, Rv, R13 and R14 are as defined in claim 1.
102. A compound according to claim 101 of formula (IVb'): . .
Figure imgf000238_0001
(IVb')
103. A compound according to claim 97 of formula (IVc):
Figure imgf000238_0002
(INc) wherein R13, R° and Rv are as defined in claim 1, Hal is a halogen atom and P5 is a hydrogen atom or a hydroxy protecting group.
104. A compound according to claim 103 of formula (IVc'):
Figure imgf000238_0003
(IVC)
105. A compound according to claim 97 of formula (IVd):
Figure imgf000239_0001
__. _ ( Vd) . wherein R13 and Rv are as defined in claim 1 and Hal is a halogen atom.
106. A compound according to claim 105 of formula (IVd'):
Figure imgf000239_0002
(IVd')
107. A compound according to claim 97 of formula (IVe):
Figure imgf000239_0003
(IVe) wherein R13, R° and Rv are as defined in claim 1, Hal is a halogen atom and Y2 is a halogen atom, a group of formula Sn(R20)3 (wherein each R20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a group of formula Si(R20)3 (wherein each R20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a group of formula B(OR21)2 wherein each R21 is the same or different and is an alkyl group or an aryl group, a group of formula CHCHCO2R14 or a group of formula CCCO2R14, wherein R14 is as defined in claim 1.
108. A compound according to claim 107 of formula (IVe'):
Figure imgf000239_0004
(IVe')
109. A compound according to claim 97 of formula (IVg):
Figure imgf000240_0001
(IVg) .. . . . . . : wherein Y2 is a halogen atom, a group of formula Sn(R"??)3 (wherein each R20 is the
— ' " — — *- ■ - " ' ' ' ' 90 same or different and is an alkyl group), a group of formula Si(R )3 (wherein each R20 is the same or different and is an alkyl group), a group of formula B(OR21)2 wherein each R21 is the same or different and is an alkyl group or an aryl group, a group of formula CHCHCO2R14 or a group of formula CCCO2R14 and R°, Rv, R13 and R14 are as defined in claim 1 above
110. A compound according to claim 109 of formula (IVg'):
Figure imgf000240_0002
(IVg')
111. A compound of formula (V) :
(V) wherein R14, R1', Ri5 and Z are as defined in claim 1.
112. A compound according to claim 111 of formula (Na):
Figure imgf000240_0004
(Va) wherein R14, R17, R18 and R20 are as defined in claim 1.
113. A compound according to claim 111 of formula (Nb) :
Figure imgf000241_0001
. .. . ___ . : . .. . . '. <Y_ __._- .- .. -■■ - wherein R17 and R18 are as defined in claim 1 and Z1 is a halogen atom or a group of formula Sn(R20)3 wherein R20 is as defined in claim 1.
114. ; A compound according to claim 111 of formula (Nc):
Figure imgf000241_0002
(Vc) wherein R14 is as defined in claim 1.
115 Dictyostatin of formula (If) or a salt thereof in substantially pure form:
Figure imgf000241_0003
116. (-)-Dictyostatin of formula (If) or a salt thereof in substantially pure form:
Figure imgf000242_0001
117. Dictyostatin according to claim 115 or 116 having a specific rotation of [α]D = -32.7 (c = 0.22, MeOH). . - - " ■ • -
118. Dictyostatin according to claim 115 or 116 having a purity of at least 99 %.
119. Dictyostatin according to claim 118 having a purity greater of at least 99.3 %.
120. Dictyostatin according to claim 118 having a purity greater of at least 99.5 %.
121. Dictyostatin according to claim 115 or 116 having high performance liquid chromatography traces as shown in Figures 10 to 12.
122. Dictyostatin according to claim 115 or 116 having a 1H nmr spectrum as shown in Figure 13.
123. Dictyostatin according to claim 115 or 116 having a 13C nmr spectrum as shown in Figure 14.
124. Dictyostatin 1 or a salt, derivative or analogue thereof having the stereochemical structure shown in Figures 1 to 4.
125. Dictyostatin 1 having the following formula (If) or a salt, derivative or analogue thereof:
Figure imgf000243_0001
126. A pharmaceutical composition comprising an effective amount of a pharmacologically active compound together with a carrier or diluent therefor, wherein said pharmacologically active compound is a compound as claimed in any one of claims 50 to 72.
127. A pharmaceutical composition comprising an effective amount of a pharmacologically active compound together with a carrier or diluent therefor, wherein said pharmacologically active compound is substantially pure dictyostatin of formula (If) or a pharmacologically acceptable salt thereof as claimed in any one of claims 115 to 123.
128. A pharmaceutical composition comprising an effective amount of a pharmacologically active compound together with a carrier or diluent therefor, wherein said pharmacologically active compound is dictyostatm 1 or a pharmacologically acceptable salt, derivative or analogue thereof as claimed in claim 124 or 125.
129. A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer, said method comprising administering an effective amount of a cytotoxic compound to a patient suffering from said cancer, wherein said cytotoxic compound is a compound as claimed in any one of claims 50 to 72.
130. A method according to claim 129, wherein said cancer is selected from the group consisting of leukemia, lung cancer, colon cancer, pancreatic cancer, ovarian cancer, uterine cancer, brain cancer, renal cancer, prostate cancer, breast cancer and melanoma.
131. A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer, said method comprising administering an effective amount of a cytotoxic compound to a patient suffering from said cancer, wherein said cytotoxic compound is a compound as defined in any one of claims 115 to 123.
132. A method according to claim 131, wherein said cancer is selected from the group consisting of leukemia, lung cancer, colon cancer, pancreatic cancer, ovarian cancer, uterine cancer, brain cancer, renal cancer, prostate cancer, breast cancer and melanoma.
133. A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer, said method comprising administering an effective amount of a cytotoxic compound to a patient suffering from said "cancer, wherein said cytotoxic compound is dictyostatin 1 or a pharmacologically acceptable salt, derivative or analogue thereof as claimed in claim 124 or 125.
134. A method according to 133, wherein said cancer is selected from the group consisting of leukemia, lung cancer, colon cancer, pancreatic cancer, ovarian cancer, uterine cancer, brain cancer, renal cancer, prostate cancer, breast cancer and melanoma.
135. A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of diseases that can be prevented or treated by compounds capable of stabilising microtubules, said method comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a pharmacologically effective amount of a compound as claimed in any one of claims 50 to 72.
136. A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of diseases that can be prevented or treated by compounds capable of stabilising microtubules, said method comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a pharmacologically effective amount of a compound as claimed in any one of claims 115 to 123.
137. A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of diseases that can be prevented or treated by compounds capable of stabilising microtubules, said method comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a pharmacologically effective amount of dictyostatin 1 or a pharmacologically acceptable salt, derivative or analogue thereof as claimed in claim 124 or 125.
138. A method for inhibiting cellular proliferation in an animal, that may be human, said method comprising adniinistering to said animal a pharmacologically effective amount of a compound as claimed in any one of claims 50 to 72.
139. A method according to claim 138, wherein said method is for the prophylaxis or freatment of an autoimmune disease or an inflammatory disease.
140. A method for inhibiting cellular proliferation in an animal, that may be human, said method comprising administering to said animal a pharmacologically effective amount of a compound as" claimed in any one of claims 115 to 123.
141. A method according to claim 140, wherein said method is for the prophylaxis or treatment of an autoimmune disease or an inflammatory disease.
142. A method for inhibiting cellular proliferation in an animal, that may be human, said method comprising administering to said animal a pharmacologically effective amount of dictyostatin 1 or a pharmacologically acceptable salt, derivative or analogue thereof as claimed in claim 124 or 125. "
143. A method according to claim 142, wherein said method is for the prophylaxis or freatment of an autoimmune disease or an inflammatory disease.
144. Use of a compound as defined in any one of claims 50 to 72 in the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer.
145. Use according to claim 144, wherein said cancer is selected from the group consisting of leukemia, lung cancer, colon cancer, pancreatic cancer, ovarian cancer, uterine cancer, brain cancer, renal cancer, prostate cancer, breast cancer and melanoma.
146. Use of a compound as defined in any one of claims 115 to 123 in the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer.
147. Use according to claim 146, wherein said cancer is selected from the group consisting of leukemia, lung cancer, colon cancer, pancreatic cancer, ovarian cancer, uterine cancer, brain cancer, renal cancer, prostate cancer, breast cancer and melanoma.
148. Use of dictyostatin 1 or a pharmacologically acceptable salt, derivative or analogue thereof as claimed in claim 124 or 125 in the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer.
149. Use according to claim 148, wherein said cancer is selected from the group consisting of leukemia, lung cancer, colon cancer, pancreatic cancer, ovarian cancer, uterine cancer, brain cancer, renal cancer, prostate cancer, breast cancer and melanoma.
150. Use of a compound as defined in any one of claims 50 to 72 in the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or freatment of diseases that can be prevented or freated by compounds capable of stabilising microtubules.
151. Use of a compound as defined in any one of claims 115 to 123 in the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of diseases that can be prevented or freated by compounds capable of stabilising microtubules.
152. Use of dictyostatin 1 or a pharmacologically acceptable salt, derivative or analogue thereof as claimed in claim 124 or 125 in the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or freatment of diseases that can be prevented or treated by compounds capable of stabilising microtubules.
153. Use of a compound as defmed in any one of claims 50 to 72 above in the manufacture of a medicament for use in a method of inhibiting cellular proliferation in an animal, that may be human.
154. Use according to claim 153, wherein said method is for the prophylaxis or treatment of an autoimmune disease or an inflammatory disease.
155. Use of a compound as defined in any one of claims 115 to 123 in the manufacture of a medicament for use in a method of inhibiting cellular proliferation m an animal, matmay.be humanr ." _ . . . - .-- - — " -.. __-_ .._
156. Use according to claim 155, wherein said method is for the prophylaxis or treatment of an autoimmune disease or an inflammatory disease.
157. Use of dictyostatin 1 or a pharmacologically acceptable salt, derivative or analogue thereof as claimed in claim 124 or 125 in the manufacture of a medicament for use in a method of inhibiting cellular proliferation in an animal, that may be human. ~ — — "" ""
158. Use according to claim 157, wherein said method is for the prophylaxis or treatment of an autoimmune disease or an inflammatory disease.
PCT/GB2004/005401 2003-12-31 2004-12-31 Methods for the synthesis of dictyostatin and derivatives and analogues thereof, stereochemical characterisation, novel dictyostatin compounds and uses thereof and synthetic intermediates WO2005068451A2 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US53348503P 2003-12-31 2003-12-31
US60/533,485 2003-12-31
GB0412744.5 2004-06-08
GB0412744A GB0412744D0 (en) 2004-06-08 2004-06-08 Methods for the synthesis of dictyostatin and derivatives and analogues thereofand novel dictyostatin compounds and synthetic intermediates
US57843804P 2004-06-09 2004-06-09
US60/578,438 2004-06-09

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2005068451A2 true WO2005068451A2 (en) 2005-07-28
WO2005068451A3 WO2005068451A3 (en) 2005-10-13

Family

ID=34799129

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/GB2004/005401 WO2005068451A2 (en) 2003-12-31 2004-12-31 Methods for the synthesis of dictyostatin and derivatives and analogues thereof, stereochemical characterisation, novel dictyostatin compounds and uses thereof and synthetic intermediates

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2005068451A2 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP1765073A2 (en) * 2004-05-27 2007-03-28 University Of Pittsburgh Analogs of dictyostatin, intermediates therefor and methods of synthesis thereof
WO2015006535A3 (en) * 2013-07-10 2015-04-16 The Trustees Of The University Of Pennsylvania Dictyostatin prodrugs and methods of their use

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5430053A (en) * 1994-04-19 1995-07-04 Arizona Board Of Regents Acting On Behalf Of Arizona State University Isolation and structure of dictyostatin 1
WO2001062239A2 (en) * 2000-02-24 2001-08-30 Harbor Branch Oceanographic Institution, Inc. Novel compositions and uses of dictyostatin compounds
WO2004022552A1 (en) * 2002-09-06 2004-03-18 University Of Pittsburgh Analogs of discodermolide and dictyostatin-1, intermediates therefor and methods of synthesis thereof

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5430053A (en) * 1994-04-19 1995-07-04 Arizona Board Of Regents Acting On Behalf Of Arizona State University Isolation and structure of dictyostatin 1
WO2001062239A2 (en) * 2000-02-24 2001-08-30 Harbor Branch Oceanographic Institution, Inc. Novel compositions and uses of dictyostatin compounds
WO2004022552A1 (en) * 2002-09-06 2004-03-18 University Of Pittsburgh Analogs of discodermolide and dictyostatin-1, intermediates therefor and methods of synthesis thereof

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
ISBRUCKER ET AL.: "Tubulin polymerizing activity of dictyostatin-1, apolyketide of marine sponge origin" BIOCHEMICAL PHARMACOLOGY, vol. 66, 1 July 2003 (2003-07-01), pages 75-82, XP002325622 *
PETTIT G R ET AL: "ISOLATION AND STRUCTURE OF THE CANCER CELL GROWTH INHIBITOR DICTYOSTATIN 1" JOURNAL OF THE CHEMICAL SOCIETY, CHEMICAL COMMUNICATIONS, CHEMICAL SOCIETY. LETCHWORTH, GB, no. 9, 1994, pages 1111-1112, XP001013066 ISSN: 0022-4936 *

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP1765073A2 (en) * 2004-05-27 2007-03-28 University Of Pittsburgh Analogs of dictyostatin, intermediates therefor and methods of synthesis thereof
EP1765073A4 (en) * 2004-05-27 2009-07-15 Univ Pittsburgh Analogs of dictyostatin, intermediates therefor and methods of synthesis thereof
WO2015006535A3 (en) * 2013-07-10 2015-04-16 The Trustees Of The University Of Pennsylvania Dictyostatin prodrugs and methods of their use

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2005068451A3 (en) 2005-10-13

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US7407975B2 (en) Epothilone derivatives, method for producing same and their pharmaceutical use
CA2116387C (en) Oxazolidinedione derivatives, their production and use
KR101173510B1 (en) Synthesis of epothilones intermediates thereto analogues and uses thereof
DE69615016T2 (en) PENTACYCLIC COMPOUNDS
KR20070113282A (en) 39-desmethoxy derivatives of rapamycin
WO2000000485A1 (en) Epothilon derivatives, their preparation process, intermediate products and their pharmaceutical use
AU2019271123A1 (en) MAGL inhibitors
IE58853B1 (en) Thiazolidine derivatives, their preparation and use
WO2018217809A1 (en) Pyrazole magl inhibitors
JP2010070503A (en) Antifungal 2-amino-triazolopyridine derivative
EP2430012A1 (en) 7-aza-spiro[3.5]nonane-7-carboxylate derivatives, preparation thereof, and therapeutic use thereof
EP2136799A1 (en) Macrocyclic compounds useful as inhibitors of kinases and hsp90
JP2004500388A (en) Synthesis of epothilone, its intermediates and analogs
EP1276740A2 (en) Novel epothilone derivatives, method for the preparation thereof and their pharmaceutical use
CA2324895A1 (en) Novel cephalotaxane derivatives and process for their preparation
KR20110003468A (en) Synthesis of resorcylic acid lactones useful as therapeutic agents
AU2021219097A1 (en) P2X3 modulators
Moloney et al. The oxazolomycins: a structurally novel class of bioactive compounds
CN116583285A (en) N- (imidazo [1,2-b ] pyridazin-3-yl) -1-cyclohexyl-2H-indazole-5-carboxamide and N- (pyrazolo [1,5-a ] pyrimidin-3-yl) -1-cyclohexyl-2H-indazole-5-carboxamide derivatives as IRAK4 inhibitors for the treatment of asthma
US9216977B2 (en) Antofine and cryptopleurine derivatives as anticancer agents
US20220362259A1 (en) Substituted pyrazoloazepin-4-ones and their use as phosphodiesterase inhibitors
US8435983B2 (en) Conformationally restrained epothilone analogues as anti-leukemic agents
US20090186868A1 (en) Taxane Compound Having Azetidine Ring Structure
WO2005068451A2 (en) Methods for the synthesis of dictyostatin and derivatives and analogues thereof, stereochemical characterisation, novel dictyostatin compounds and uses thereof and synthetic intermediates
Xu Towards Synthesis of Simplified Analogues of Pateamine A

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BW BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EC EE EG ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NA NI NO NZ OM PG PH PL PT RO RU SC SD SE SG SK SL SY TJ TM TN TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VC VN YU ZA ZM ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): GM KE LS MW MZ NA SD SL SZ TZ UG ZM ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IS IT LT LU MC NL PL PT RO SE SI SK TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GQ GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
NENP Non-entry into the national phase in:

Ref country code: DE

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Country of ref document: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase